SCADA Study Material

Contents of Windows Control Center.
Working With Projects.

Before you can monitor and control a process, you must first create a project in WinCC. You
should define all the necessary elements, components and settings in this project.
This chapter shows you:
How to open and close WinCC software and the WinCC Explorer.
The structure of the WinCC Explorer.
The types of project in WinCC.
How to create a project and work with project.
How to activate and deactivate a project.
How to copy a project.
Working with tags.

This chapter contains all important items of information about tags:
Tag Management and tag selection dialog box.

Tag types.
Create and edit tags.
Logging tags in Runtime.
Creating Process Pictures

The Graphics Designer is an editor for creating process pictures and making them dynamic.
This chapter will show you :
How to use the Graphics Designer editor.

Elements and basic settings of the Graphics Designer.
Working with Pictures.
Working with objects.
The properties of an object.
Working with objects in the Object Palette.
Working with Controls.
Testing Process Pictures in Runtime.
Setting Up an Alarm System
Alarm Logging in WinCC.

Principles of Message System.
Configuring the Message System.
Message Archiving.
Displaying messages in Runtime.
On Line Trend Control
How to create an On Line Trend

WinCC Function Trend control
Displaying On Line Trend in Runtime
CHAPTER-I
Working With Projects

Opening the WinCC Explorer
Introduction
When you start WinCC, the WinCC Explorer normally opens.
After installation, WinCC is entered in the start menu of the operating system. WinCC can be
started with the "WinCC V6.0" command.
The WinCC Explorer can also be opened from the desktop or using the Windows Explorer.
Note:
If you only have a runtime license installed on a computer, you can only work in the WinCC
Explorer or in a WinCC editor for one hour. If the WinCC Explorer or a WinCC editor
remains open for more than one hour, WinCC changes to the demonstration mode.
Principle
You can open the WinCC Explorer in the following ways:
from the Windows Start menu

by clicking the WinCCExplorer.exe file in the Windows Explorer
using a shortcut from the Windows Desktop
in the Windows Explorer using a project file <PROJECT>.MCP
with Autostart
with a project that opens in Autostart
You can start WinCC only once on a computer. If you attempt to open the WinCC Explorer
when it is already open, this will be prevented without an error message. You can continue to
work normally in the open WinCC Explorer.
Start Mode of the WinCC Explorer

Open project
When you start WinCC the first time, the WinCC Explorer is opened without a project.
Whenever you start WinCC again, the last project you had open will be opened again.
With the key combination <SHIFT> and <ALT>, you can prevent WinCC from opening a
project immediately. Press the <SHIFT> key and the <ALT> key when WinCC starts. Keep
the keys pressed until the window of the WinCC Explorer appears. The WinCC Explorer
opens without opening a project.
Activated Project
If the project was activated when you exited WinCC runtime, it will be opened in runtime
again when you restart WinCC.
If you close a project and open another project that was opened the last time in the activated
state, WinCC once again opens the project in runtime.
With the key combination <SHIFT> and <CTRL>, you can prevent WinCC activating
runtime immediately. Press the <SHIFT> key and the <CTRL> while WinCC is opening.
Keep the keys pressed until the project is open and displayed fully in the WinCC Explorer.
WinCC opens the last project without starting runtime.

Windows Start Menu
You can open the WinCC Explorer from the Windows Start menu. In the folder "SIMATIC"
> "WinCC", select the entry "WinCC V6.0". WinCC Explorer opens.
Windows Explorer
You can start WinCC with the "WinCCExplorer.exe" start file. You can locate the
"WinCCExplorer.exe" file in the Windows Explorer in your installation path in "WinCC\bin".
Windows Desktop
You can create a shortcut for the "WinCCExplorer.exe" file. You then place this shortcut on
the desktop of the computer.
Opening a Project in the Windows Explorer

You can start WinCC by opening a WinCC project in the Windows Explorer. Open the file
<PROJECT>.MCP in the installation path of the project.
You can only start a project from the Windows Explorer when WinCC has not yet started.
Autostart
You can also start WinCC using Autostart when the computer starts up. Create a shortcut for
the "WinCCExplorer.exe" file and move this shortcut to the "Autostart" folder of your
computer. Each time you start the Windows system, WinCC will also be started
automatically.
Opening the WinCC Explorer with a Project Open

You can close the WinCC Explorer without closing the open project. You can reopen the
WinCC Explorer from the Windows Start menu or by clicking a shortcut on the desktop. This
also applies even if you open a project using Autostart only in runtime.
Remote WinCC Startup
You can start WinCC of another computer in the network. You will find more detailed
information in the WinCC Information System under "Configurations" > "Multi-User
Systems" > "Remote Configuration".
Opening a Project
"File" > "Open" Menu Command
In the WinCC Explorer, you open a project with the "Open" command in the "File" menu. In
the "Open" window, select the project folder and open the project file <PROJECT>.MCP.
"File" > "Last File" Menu Command
In the "File" menu, you can open one of the last files opened with the "Last File" menu
command. Up to eight projects are displayed.
"Open" Button
You can open a project with the
button in the toolbar.
Opening a Project with Autostart

You can open a specific project using Autostart when your computer starts up. To do this, you
use the "Autostart" tool of WinCC.
Note:
If you open a project while another project is active in runtime, runtime is deactivated and
the previously active project is closed.

Introduction
When you close the WinCC Explorer, you normally close the project that was last open at the
same time.
If runtime is activated, or if you have opened a WinCC editor, you can close the WinCC
Explorer separately. The project remains open and active if it was already active. Open
editors are not closed. You can open the WinCC Explorer again from the Windows Start
menu or from a shortcut on the desktop.
You can close the WinCC Explorer regardless of whether a project is open. The relevant
WinCC processes continue to run in the background. When you open the WinCC Explorer
again, WinCC does not need to reload the project data and the Explorer takes less time to
open.
Principle
You can exit WinCC in the following ways:
With the "Exit" menu command in the WinCC Explorer menu bar
With the "Shut Down" menu command in the WinCC Explorer menu bar
With the "Close" button
When you shut down Windows
With a C action in the activated project
Note:
After starting, WinCC always opens the last project that was open before you exited. If the
project was activated when you exited WinCC, it will be opened in runtime again.
Closing the WinCC Explorer

"File" Menu, "Exit" Command
You close the WinCC Explorer with the "Exit" menu command in the "File" menu. The "Exit
WinCC Explorer" dialog box opens.
In the list box, you can select one of the following options:
Option
WinCC Action
Close project and exit WinCC

Explorer
If active, the project is also deactivated and closed. The

WinCC Explorer and all open WinCC editors are closed.
Exit WinCC Explorer
Only the WinCC Explorer closes. The project remains open

and active if it was already active. WinCC editors remain
open.
"File" Menu, "Shut Down" Command

In the "File" menu of the menu bar, there is a command called "Shut Down". Depending on
your computer configuration, you can exit WinCC with "Shut Down" and at the same time
shut down the computer.
"Close" Button
You can close the WinCC Explorer with the button in the top right corner of the window
Exiting Windows
When you exit Windows or log off the current user, WinCC closes completely.
C Action in the Activated Project
You can, for example, configure a button in the project with which you can exit Windows. To
do this, you use the "Exit WinCC" or "Exit WinCC or Windows" dynamic wizards.
The structure of the WinCC Explorer

Elements of the WinCC Explorer
Structure of the WinCC Explorer
The user interface of the WinCC Explorer consists of the following elements:
Title bar
Menu bar
Toolbar
Status bar
Navigation window and data window
Menu Bar of the WinCC Explorer

Introduction
The menu bar of the WinCC Explorer includes most of the commands that you can use in the
Windows Explorer. Commands that you cannot use in the current situation are disabled
(displayed in gray).
Some commands are available only when you open the pop-up menu of an element in a
window.
Some commands can be activated using the key combinations (shortcut keys) familiar from
Windows.
The following tables provide brief information on the commands in the menu bar. The
"Online Help (Chapter)" column indicates the relevant chapters in the WinCC Information
System that contain more detailed information.
"File" Menu
The "File" menu includes the following commands:
Command
Key
Function
Combination
Online Help (Chapter)
New
<CTRL+N> Creates a new project.
Working with Projects >

Creating and Editing
Projects
Open
<CTRL+O> Opens an existing project.

Projects
Close
---
Closes an open project.

Projects
Activate
---
Starts an open project in runtime.

Activating a Project
Print Project
--Documentation
Prints the project documentation.
Documentation of
Configuration and
Runtime Data > Project
Documentation
View Project
--Documentation
Starts the print preview of the

project documentation.
Documentation of
Configuration and
Documentation
Project
--Documentation
Setup
Sets up the project documentation

for printing.
Documentation of
Configuration and
Documentation
Recent File
---
Displays the most recently opened Working with Projects >

projects up to a maximum of eight. Creating and Editing
You can select one of the projects Projects
and open it.
Exit
<ALT+F4>
Opens a dialog in which you can

close the WinCC Explorer.

Closing the WinCC
Explorer
Shut Down
---
Exits WinCC and shuts down the

computer.

Closing the WinCC
Explorer
"Edit" Menu
The "Edit" menu includes the following commands:
Command
Key
Function
Combination
Undo
<CTRL+Z> Undoes the last action. This

command is not available for all
actions.
---
Cut
<CTRL+X> Cuts the selected object. With

--"Paste", the object can be moved to
another location.
Copy
<CTRL+C> Copies the selected object to the

clipboard.
---
Paste
<CTRL+V> Pastes a copied or cut object.
---
Delete
<DEL>
---
Characteristics ---
Deletes a selected element.
Displays the "Properties" dialog of a Refer to the description of

selected element.
the relevant editor.
"View" Menu
The "View" menu includes the following commands:
Command Key
Function
Combination
Toolbars
Displays or hides the toolbar.
Working with Projects > The

WinCC Explorer
Status Bar ---
Displays or hides the status bar.
Working with Projects > The

WinCC Explorer
Large
Symbols
---
Displays the elements in the data

window as large symbols.
---
Small
Symbols
---

window as small symbols.
---
List
---

window as a list of names.
---
Details
---

window as a list of names with
additional information, for example
date of change and file type.
Refer to the description of

the relevant editor.
Refresh
<F5>
Refreshes the view in the data

window.
---
---
"Tools" Menu
The "Tools" menu includes the following commands:
Command
Key
Function
Combination
Language
---
Changes the user interface language Structure of Multi-language

of the WinCC Explorer and the
Projects > Language
editors.
Support in WinCC
Status of
Driver
---
Displays the status of logical

connections in the project.
Communication
Diagnostics > Channel
Connections
Status of
--Server
Connections
Diagnostics
Displays the current status of all
involved servers and clients of a
multi-user system at the WinCC
client and the WinCC server of a
server-server communication,
respectively.

The WinCC Explorer
Green = Connection status:

Established, data exchange taking
place.
Gray = Connection status:
Established, no data exchange.
Red = Connection status:
Disconnected.
Status of
--Client
Connections
Displays the current status of all

servers and clients involved in a
WinCC server.
Green = Connection status:
Established, data exchange taking
place.
Gray = Connection status:
Established, no data exchange.
Red = Connection status:
Disconnected.

The WinCC Explorer
"Help" Menu
The "Help" menu includes the following commands:
Command Key
Function
Combination
Contents <F1>
and Index
---
Opens the WinCC information

system.
Direct
Help
<SHIFT+F1> Activates Direct Help.
---
Use Help ---
Tips on working with help.
About
WinCC
Explorer
Displays the installed version and the --installed components of WinCC.
---
---
Toolbar of the WinCC Explorer

Introduction
Using the buttons in the toolbar, you can activate commands. You can also hide the toolbar in
the WinCC Explorer by pointing to the "View" menu in the menu bar and selecting the
"Toolbar" command.
Buttons in the Toolbar
The toolbar in the WinCC Explorer contains buttons with the following functions:
Icon Tooltip
Meaning
New
Creates a new project.
Open
Opens a project.
Deactivate
Exits runtime.
Activate
Starts the project in runtime.
Cut
Cuts a selected object. The object is deleted at its original location as

soon as it is pasted elsewhere.
Copy
Copies an object to the clipboard. The object can be duplicated at the

same location or a comparable location in the path.
Paste
Pastes a cut or copied object.
Large Symbols Elements in the data window are displayed as large symbols.
Small Symbols Elements in the data window are displayed as small symbols.
List
Elements in the data window are displayed as a list of names only.
Details
Elements in the data window are displayed as a list with detailed

information.
Characteristics Opens the "Properties" dialog of an element.

Help
Activates the direct help for an element you then left click.
For further information on the commands, refer to the section "Menu Bar".
Status and Title Bar of WinCC Explorer

Introduction
The status bar and title bar contain general information on the project and settings in the
editor.
Title Bar
The current path of the open WinCC project is displayed.
Status Bar
Status
Displays tips on editing and displays the current path of a

file.
Number of configured tags /

Number of power tags
Number of configured external tags / number of tags

covered by a license.
Object(s)
Number of objects of the selected editor, e.g. the number of

pictures in Graphics Designer
CAPS
Shift function is active (upper case).
NUM
The numeric pad on the right of the keyboard is active.
SCRL
The Windows "Scroll" function is active.
Types of Project
Introduction
There are three types of project available in WinCC:
Single-user project
Multi-user project
Client project
Single-User Project
Introduction
If you only want to work with one computer in a WinCC project, create a single-user project.
The WinCC project runs on one computer that functions as the server for processing the data
and as an operator input station. Other computers cannot access the project.
Principle
The computer on which you create the single-user project is configured as a server.
The computer is connected to the programmable controller via the process communication.
Redundancy
You can also create a single-user project as a redundant system. In this case, you configure a
single-user project with a second redundant server.
Archive Server
You can also create an archive server for a single-user project. In this case, you configure a
single-user project and a second server on which the data of the single-user project is
archived.
Multi-User Project
Introduction
If you only want to work with several computers in a WinCC project, create a multi-user
project.
For a multi-user system, there are two basic options:
Multi-user system with one or more servers:

Several servers with one or more clients. One client accesses several servers. The
runtime data is distributed on different servers. The configuration data is on the
servers and on the clients.
Multi-user system with only one server:

One server with one or more clients. All the data is on the server.
Principle
You create a multi-user project on the server. The server is connected to the programmable
controller via the process communication.
In the multi-user project, you configure the clients that access the server. In a second step,
you create the required client projects on the relevant computers.
If you want to work with several servers, duplicate the multi-user project on the second
server. Adapt the duplicated project accordingly. You can also create a second multi-user
project on the second server that is independent of the project on the first server.
A server can also access another server in the role of client. You can use this option, for
example, when you use an archive server or a file server.
Client Project
Introduction
If you create a multi-user project, you must then create the clients that access the server. You
create a client program on the computer that will be used as a client.
For a WinCC client, there are two basic options:
Multi-user system with one or more servers:

The client accesses several servers. The runtime data is distributed on different
servers. The configuration data on the multi-user projects is on the relevant servers.
There may be local configuration data in the client projects on the clients: Pictures,
scripts, and tags.
Multi-user system with only one server:

The client accesses a single server. All the data is located on the server and is
referenced on the clients.
An archive server or a file server can also access another server in the role of client.
Note:
The WinCC client replaces the clients and multi-clients that were used in WinCC up to
version V5.1. Depending on the configuration, a WinCC client takes over the role of a V5.1
client or a V5.1 multi-client.
Principle
You create a multi-user project on the server. The server is connected to the programmable
controller via the process communication. In the multi-user project, you create the clients that
access the server.
If you configure a multi-user system with only one server, you do not create a separate client
project on the WinCC client.
If you configure a multi-user system with several servers, you must create a separate client
project on each client. This also applies when you only want to access one server but require
additional configuration data on the client.
Multi-User System with One or More Servers
To access more than one server, you create a client project on the client. You specify the
project properties on the WinCC client.
On the server, you create packages using the Serverdata component. The packages contain all
the important configuration data of the multi-user project. You load the packages on the
WinCC client.
You only need to create and compile the packages once manually. If the configuration data on
a server is modified, WinCC automatically generates the required packages. The packages
can be downloaded to the clients automatically or manually.
Central Server Configuration for a Multi-User System with One Server
If you want to configure a client that accesses only one server, specify all the settings in the
multi-user system on the server. When you edit the startup list of the client, you should only
start applications that are actually required on the client.
You do not create a separate project on the client. You start the server project using remote
access. You will find more detailed information in the WinCC Information System under
"Configurations" > "Multi-User Systems".
Web Client
You can configure a client that accesses the server over the intranet or over the Internet. If
you require this type of access, you create a Web client with the WinCC Web Navigator
option.
How to Create a Project

Introduction
If you want to create a new project, you must first make several basic settings in WinCC.
Based on these settings, WinCC creates a project that you can edit immediately.
Principle
Follow the steps outlined below when creating a project:
Define project type

Specify the project name and project folder
If required, enter the name of the configuration engineer, the project version, and a
comment
Specify the computer properties
Specify the settings for runtime
You can specify the computer properties and the settings for runtime immediately after
creating the project or during configuration. For more detailed information, referred to the
sections "Specifying Computer Properties" and "Settings for Runtime"
Procedure
Procedure
Click on the
button in the WinCC Explorer toolbar.
1 The "WinCC Explorer" dialog box opens.
Select the required type of project and confirm with "OK".

2 The "Create a New Project" window opens.
4
In the "Drive" list box under "Project Path", select the drive on which you want to create the
project folder.
5 In the "Folder" list box under "Project Path", select the path in which you want to create the
project folder.
6 Confirm with "Create".
WinCC creates a project with the required name and opens the project in the WinCC
Explorer.
7 Click on the project name in the navigation window of the WinCC Explorer and select the
"Properties" command in the Pop-up menu.
The "Project Properties" dialog opens.
8 In the General tab, you go to the name of the configuration engineer, a project version, and
a comment. Change the project type with the "Type" list box.
9 Click on the "OK" button to close the dialog.
Alternative Procedure
You can create a new project in the following ways:
When you first start WinCC

In the menu bar of the WinCC Explorer in the "File" menu with the "New" command
With the shortcut key <CTRL+N>
How to Specify the Computer Properties

Introduction
When you create a project, you must adapt the properties of the computer on which the
project will be activated.
In a multi-user system, you must adapt the properties individually for each computer you
create.
Procedure
Procedure
1 Click on the "Computer" component in the navigation window of the WinCC
Explorer.
WinCC displays the list of computers in the data window.
Select the required computer and select the "Properties" command in the context2 sensitive menu.
The "Computer Properties" dialog opens.
3 Check whether the correct computer is entered in the "Computer Name" input box.
You will find the computer name in the Windows Control Panel under "System" on
the Network Identification (Windows 2000) or Computer Name (Windows XP) tab.
If you create a multi-user project, the "Computer Type" indicates whether the
4 computer is configured as a server or as a client.
If you have already created other computers in the project, these will be displayed in
the "Names of Clients" or "Names of Server" box. The labeling of the box depends on
whether you are displaying the computer properties of a server or of a client.
Changing the Computer Name
You can change the computer name in a project. Before WinCC accepts the modified
computer name, you must close and reopen the project.
Note:
If the field "Computer Name" does not contain the proper computer name, Graphics Designer
will open a picture in the English configuration language, regardless of the language settings.
You may reset the desired language in Graphics Designer.
Activating a Project
Introduction
If you wish to operate and observe a process , you must activate the respective project.
WinCC starts runtime and activates communication with the programmable controller. All
process data is stored in the runtime databases.
This section explains
the settings you can make in runtime

how to activate a project
how to deactivate a project
how to activate a project automatically when you boot your computer
Note:
When you start WinCC or open a project, holding down the keys <CTRL + SHIFT> prevents
WinCC from activating runtime at the same time.
When starting WinCC, if you hold down the keys <ALT + SHIFT>, you prevent WinCC
opening a project at the same time. This also prevents runtime being started at the same time.
Settings you can make in runtime

Introduction
When you activate a project, additional program modules required for execution in runtime
are loaded. In the startup list, you specify which applications will be started when you
activate a project.
Depending on the configuration, WinCC itself enters some applications in the startup list.
Graphics Runtime is always started and is activated as default.
To achieve better performance, you should only start applications that you actually require in
runtime.
Procedure
Procedure
1 Click on the "Computer" component in the navigation window of the WinCC Explorer.
WinCC displays the list of computers in the data window.
Select the required computer and select the "Properties" command in the context2 sensitive menu.
The "Computer Properties" dialog opens.
3 Click on the Startup tab.
4 Activate the applications to loaded when runtime starts in the "Start sequence of WinCC
runtime" list box.
The activated modules are indicated by a check mark in front of the entry in the list. With
the "Edit" button, you can open a dialog in which you can enter start parameters for an
application.
If you want to open additional programs or tasks when you start runtime, click on the
5 "Add" button.
The "Add Application" dialog opens.
6 Enter the required application and the full path in the "Application" input box. You can
locate the file using the "Browse" button.
If required, select the start parameters, the working folder for the application, and the
7 window properties.
Confirm with "OK".
The added application is entered in the "Additional Tasks/Applications" box. With the
"Remove" button, you can delete an application from the startup list.
8 Select an application and click on the "Up" and "Down" buttons. This is how you specify
the order in which the applications are started. The list of additional applications is read
out from top to bottom.
How to Start Runtime

Introduction
When you start runtime, you activate your project. All configured processes are started and
run if the status of the system permits. You can also activate your project on a test system.
You may receive error messages, however, it processes cannot run as intended on the test
system.
Principle
You can start Runtime in several ways:
From the toolbar of the WinCC Explorer

From the menu bar of the WinCC Explorer
When you start WinCC
From Autostart when you start the Windows system
During configuration you can call individual pictures in runtime:
From the toolbar of the Graphics Designer

From the menu bar of the Graphics Designer
Requirements
The computer must have the required Runtime license installed.

The correct computer name must be entered in the project.
A picture must be specified as the start picture.
Note:
On project activating, free memory space of at least 100 MByte must be available.
Procedure
Procedure
1 Open the required project in the WinCC Explorer.
2
Click on the
The "Activate DATABASENAME" dialog opens. WinCC displays the applications that will
be started. The "WinCC Runtime" window opens with the settings you selected in the
"Computer Properties" dialog.
Note:
During start of WinCC or during opening of a project, holding down the key combination
<Shift+Ctrl> prevents that WinCC activates the project immediately.
When starting WinCC, if you hold down the keys <SHIFT + ALT>, you prevent WinCC
opening a project immediately. This also prevents runtime being started at the same time.
Alternative Procedures

Open the "File" menu in the menu bar and select the "Activate" command. As long as
runtime is activated, WinCC displays a check mark beside the "Activate" command.
When you start WinCC
You can exit WinCC while a project is activated. When you restart WinCC again, WinCC
opens the project and starts runtime immediately.
Autostart when You Start the Windows System
You can also start WinCC using Autostart when the computer starts up. You can also specify
that WinCC starts immediately in runtime.
Graphics Designer
You can call a picture opened in the Graphics Designer in runtime. If runtime is already open,
the picture replaces the current screen.
You can use this function in the following situations:
You want to test a picture in runtime.
You want to update a picture in an activated project without any delay.
In the toolbar, you can start runtime using the
button.
In the menu bar, you can start runtime in the "File" menu with the "Activate Runtime"
command.
Note:
You cannot exit Runtime from Graphics Designer. Exit runtime in WinCC Explorer.
How to Exit Runtime

Introduction
When you exit runtime, you deactivate your project. All active processes are stopped.
Principle
You can exit runtime in several ways:
From the toolbar of the WinCC Explorer

From the menu bar of the WinCC Explorer
When you close a project
When you close the WinCC Explorer
With a C action in the activated project
Procedure
Procedure
1 Change to the WinCC Explorer.
2
Click on the
The "Deactivate DATABASENAME" dialog opens. WinCC displays the applications that
will be exited. The "WinCC Runtime" window closes.

Open the "File" menu in the menu bar and select the "Activate" command. WinCC removes
the check mark beside the command indicating that runtime is activated.
Closing the Project
You can close the project running in runtime. This deactivates the project.
Closing the WinCC Explorer
You can close WinCC while a project is activated. This deactivates the project.
Note:
After starting, WinCC always opens the last project that was open before you exited. If the
project was activated when you exited WinCC, it will be opened in runtime again.
C Action in the Activated Project

You can, for example, configure a button in the project with which you can exit Windows. To
do this, you use the "Exit WinCC Runtime" and "Exit WinCC" dynamic wizards.
How to Copy a Project

Depending on the status of the project, you may use the Project Duplicator to copy
configuration and Runtime data.
The following table shows which data are transferred during copying of a project:
Project Status
Configuration Data
Runtime Data
Project closed
Project open and deactivated
Project in Runtime
Note:
It is advisable to make backups of a project at regular intervals while you are creating the
configuration. This allows you to go back to an earlier version of the project and continue
from there.
If you modify a project later, you should also make a backup on completion of each change.
If necessary, you can then revert to the original version without having to edit the project
again.
Principle
Select the project you want to copy in the Project Duplicator.
Specify the folder where you want the copied project to be created. In the description below,
this is called the target folder.
The target folder can be on the same computer or on a computer in the network for which
you have access rights. The project folder is created in the target folder. When you copy it,
you can change the name of the project. The project folder is created with the project name.
You can only copy the entire project and the entire folder structure. You cannot exclude any
data or folders from the copy operation.
After, the project has been duplicated, you can open and edit or activate it immediately. If
you copy the project to another computer, you must, however, adapt the computer name in
the project.
Note:
If the "Duplicate" or "Save As ..." options of the Project Duplicator are used, the same
WinCC version must be installed on the destination computer.
Copying to a Storage Medium
You cannot copy a project directly to a data medium. If you want to copy a project for
archiving on an external data medium such as a CD-ROM, copy the project to a local folder.
You then copy this folder to the data medium.
If you compress the project data before copying, for example in a ZIP archive, you require
less space on the data medium. This also prevents each individual file becoming read-only
after copying to a CD-ROM.
Requirements
If only configuration data are copied, the project may be opened and remain
activated. Another project may remain open on the source computer and may run in
Runtime.
You have created the target folder.
You have access rights for the target folder.
No WinCC project must be open on the target computer since write-protected or

system-accessed data cannot be overwritten by the Project Duplicator.
The target computer has enough free space on the hard disk.
Procedure
Procedure
In the Windows Start menu, select "Simatic" then > "WinCC" > then "Tools" and finally the
1 "Project Duplicator" command. The WinCC Project Duplicator opens.
Enter the project you want to duplicate in the "Select the source project that is to be
2 duplicated" box. You can enter the folder path and the project file <PROJECT>.MCP
directly or browse for them with the
button.
Click on the "Save As..." button. The "Save as a WinCC Project" dialog opens.
3
4 Select the folder to which you want to copy your project and enter the name of the project
in the "File name" box.
If you want to copy the project and give it a new name, enter the new name here. The
project files are renamed accordingly when the project is copied.
5 Click on the "Save" button.
The "Copying..." dialog opens. When copying, the Project Duplicator displays the files and
folders with a progress bar. With the "Cancel" button, you can stop the copying.
6 Close the Project Duplicator with the "Close" button.
7 If you have copied the project to another computer, the original computer name is still
entered in the project properties. Correct the computer name in the project properties when
you open the project the first time. The modified computer name is adopted after you close
and open the project again.

Note:
If you duplicate an open WinCC project on the source computer, no progress bar will be
displayed.
You can also copy a project in the Simatic Manager using the "Load Target System" function.
For more detailed information, refer to the WinCC Information System under "Working with
WinCC" > "Integration of WinCC in the SIMATIC Manager"
CHAPTER-II
Creating Data Base of Tags
Tag Management
Introduction
Tag Management administers the tags and communication drivers used in the project. You
will find Tag Management in the navigation window of WinCC Explorer.
Usage
Tags with values supplied by the process are referred to as process or external tags in WinCC.
In the case of process tags, Tag Management determines the communication driver by means
of which WinCC is connected to the automation system and how the exchange of data is
taking place. The associated tags are created in the directory structure of this communication
driver.
Tags not supplied with values by the process, known as the "internal tags", are created in the
"Internal Tags" directory.
To provide a better overview, you can arrange the tags in Tag Management in groups.
Creating tags in Tag Management leads to a directory structure in which you can navigate in
a manner similar to Windows directories.
Configuration of Tag Management
Navigation window
You will find Tag Management in the navigation window of WinCC Explorer.
Internal tags and associated tag groups will be found in the "Internal Tags" directory.
WinCC creates a new directory in Tag Management for each communication driver that is set
up. Under the communication driver you will find a channel unit, its connections and
associated tag groups and process tags.
Tag Management uses the following icons:
Icon
Meaning
Tag Management
Internal Tags
Communication drivers
Channel Unit
Connection
Tag Group
Tag
Structure type
Data window
The data window of WinCC Explorer shows you the contents of the directory you selected in
the navigation window.
Tooltip
In Runtime you can view the status information on connections and tags as a tooltip. To view
it, move the mouse pointer in the data window to the connection or tag you want.
The tooltip contains the following information:
with a connection, brief information about the state

The current process value of a tag
The quality code of a tag
The date on which a tag was last changed
Menu bar
At "Edit" you can cut, copy, paste and delete tags and tag groups. At "Edit" > "Properties"
you can view the properties of the selected tag, the communication driver, the channel unit or
connection.
At "View" you can modify the way in which objects are presented in the data window and
update the display.
Toolbar
For tags and tag groups you can use the "Cut", "Copy", "Paste" and "Properties" buttons.
You can modify the display in the data window by means of the "Large Icons", "Small
Icons", "List" and "Details" buttons.
Status bar
The status bar can display the following information, regardless of the operated object:
Current directory path in the project and tips on operation

External tags: Number of configured process tags
License: Number of licensed process tags (power tags)
Find
In Tag Management you can open the search function from the shortcut menu.
You can search for tags, tag groups, connections, channel units and communication drivers.
Tag Management and tags

Introduction
Communication between WinCC and the automation system takes place by means of
communication drivers. Data generated by the automation system or the WinCC project are
transferred by means of tags.
This chapter provides infomation on managing tags and on the different types of tags.
Tags
Introduction
Data are passed on in a WinCC project by means of tags. A tag has a data address and a
symbolic name, which is used in the project. The data address is used in communication with
the automation system.
WinCC works with two kinds of tags:
Process tags
Internal Tags
WinCC simplifies tag handling by means of two other object types:
Tag groups
Structure types
Name conventions
When naming tags, you must respect certain conventions:
Tag names must be unique throughout the project. When tags are created, WinCC
does not distinguish between upper and lower case characters in a name.
Tag names must not be longer than 128 characters. In the case of structure tags, this
limit applies to the whole expression "structure tag name + dot + structure tag
element name".
You must not use certain characters in tag names. You will find the characters you
must not include in a name in the WinCC Information System at "Working with
projects" > "Authorized characters"
Note:
You must not create tags whose name starts with an '@'. Tags with an @ prefix are created
only by WinCC and PCS 7.
Note:
Remember that WinCC distinguishes between upper and lower case characters in a
configuration. If you change upper and lower case characters in a tag name, you must adapt
your configuration accordingly.
Updating tags
In the case of process tags, the current tag values are transferred over the communication
connection between WinCC and the connected automation systems in Runtime. In this
instance, WinCC accesses the data area on the automation system that is defined in the tag
properties. The current value of the process tag is made available by WinCC in Tag
Management after it has been transferred for further processing and evaluation. Conversely,
WinCC can also write data back to the automation system.
In WinCC you set the frequency of data transfer and of updating in the display. Remember
while you are configuring that periodic updating of tags results in severe loading of the
system and can have an adverse effect on performance.
Importing tags
You can also create tags external to WinCC and import them into your project.
For example, you can establish a connection to the WinCC configuration tool for your project
and create the tags with the help of the configuration tool in an Excel table. You assign
certain properties to these tags in the table. WinCC can use the configuration tool to read in
the data and then automatically creates the tags with the specified properties.
Process Tags
Definition
You use process tags for communication between WinCC and the automation system.
The properties of process tags depend on the communication driver being used. Therefore,
create process tags in Tag Management also under a specific communication driver, its
channel unit and its connections.
You can set the following properties for process tags:
Name
Data type
Address on the channel unit
Adapt format
Limit values
Start value
Replacement value
Scaling
Note:
Process tags are also referred to "external tags" on the system.
Usable data types

You can use the following data types for process tags:
Binary tag
Signed 8-bit value
Unsigned 8-bit value
Signed 16-bit value
Signed 32-bit value
Floating-point number 32-bit IEEE 754
Text tag 8-bit
Text tag 16-bit character set
Raw data tag
Licensing of Power Tags

For WinCC, you purchase licenses to be able to use a certain number of process tags and
archive tags.
Power tags are licensed process tags. With a license covering 1024 power tags, for example,
you are able to operate a WinCC project in Runtime on a computer which uses up to 1024
process tags. The number of licensed and configured process tags will be seen in the status
bar of WinCC Explorer.
Licenses are divided into the following types
"RC": for configuration and Runtime of a certain number of process tags
"RT": only for Runtime of a certain number of process tags
Note:
The process tags required for the "System Info" channel need no licenses. Thus, the tags are
not entered in the license count.
Internal Tags
Definition
Internal tags are not connected to the process.
You use Internal tags to manage data within a project or to transfer data to an archive.
You can set the following properties for internal tags:
Name
Data type
Updates project-wide/on local computers (only relevant with multi-user projects

without additional client projects)
Limit values
Start value
Usable data types

You can use the following data types for internal tags:
Text reference
Binary tag
Signed 8-bit value
Signed 16-bit value
Signed 32-bit value
Text tag 8-bit
Raw data tag
System tags
WinCC applications create tags required for internal administration of the project. The names
of these tags begin with an "@" character. You cannot delete or rename these tags. You can
evaluate, but not change, the value of the tag.
Exceptions to this rule are tags created with the "Redundancy" option. They can be set by
means of scripts, for example:
@RM_MASTER
@RM_MASTER_NAME
Note:
Structure types and structure tags

Definition
WinCC Structure types simplify the creation of several tags having identical properties.
Designation Definition
Displayed in...
Structure
type
Component "Structure
Types"
Structure
element
A structure type denotes a scheme that is used in

WinCC to create a certain group of tags. A structure
type contains at least one structure element.
A structure element is a component of a structure

type. It is used as a template when creating a structure Types" > Structure Type >
tag with the help of a structure type.
"Structure Properties"
dialog box
A structure tag is a tag that was created with the help
Structure tag of a structure type. The template of a structure tag is a Component "Tag
structure element.
Management" > "Internal
Tags" or a connection,
The name of a structure tag consists of the name of the under which the structure
structure instance and the name of the structure
tags were created with the
Structure
instance
element being used. Both parts of the name are

help of structure type.
separated by a dot.
If the tags defined in a structure type are created with
the help of the structure type, a structure instance
occurs. The structure instances created with the same Types" > Structure Type
structure type are displayed under this structure type
in the data window.
The name of a structure instance is also referred to as
the tag prefix.
Principle
You define a certain tag structure when you create a structure type.
You create a structure type in WinCC Explorer. You create a structure element for each tag.
You assign the properites to a structure element which the tag created by that should possess.
When creating a tag, assign a created structure type as data type. The structure types are
displayed in the "Data Type" selection window according to standard data types. WinCC
creates a structure instance under the associated structure type and the structure tags in Tag
Management. The created structure tags are defined by the structure elements of this type.
In the same structue type, you can define structure elements for internal tags and process
tags. When a structure instance is created under the connection of a communication driver,
the process tags defined in the structure type are created under the connection. The internal
tags, however, are created in Tag Management at "Internal tags".
Modifying structure types
If you have created a structure instance with a structure type, you can no longer modify the
properties of this structure type. You must first delete the structure instance. In doing so, you
also delete all associated structure tags. After that you can change the properties of the
structure type and the structure elemets and regenerate a structue instance.
You can modify the properties of structure instances and structure tags later. If you rename
the structure instance, then rename the associated tags at the same time.
Usage
If a certain tag configuration occurs several times in your system, use structure types. In this
instance, for example, several temperature controllers can be involved that are always set up
according to the same principle.
Consider which tags you require for the temperature controller.
Then create a TEMPERATURE structure type in which each tag is represented by a structure
element, for example ELEMENT_1, ELEMENT_2, ELEMENT_3. Each time you create a
new structure instance with this structure type, WinCC automatically generates all structure
tags for the corresponding temperature regulator.
You use the created structure tags when, for example, you configure pictures which you
would like to integrate by means of picture windows.
Structure types in picture windows
You configure a picture, TEMP_REGLER.PDL, for the temperature regulator. You do not
connect the objects in the picture with tags but with structure elements.
To do this, you have to enter the name manually, since you cannot directly enter elements by
means of a dialog box. Alternatively, you can connect structure tags you have created and
delete the first part of the name, which is determined by the structure instance. You link e.g.
the structure tags of the structure REGLER_A. In the tag name displayed, e.g.
REGLER_A.ELEMENT_1, delete the REGLER_A and the linking point in the input field.
Configure a picture window and integrate the picture TEMP_REGLER.PDL. Open the object
properties of the picture window. Accept one of the created structure instances with a dot
behind the name, such as "CONTROLLER_A.", as the tag prefix.
Configure a second picture window with the picture TEMP_REGLER.PDL and the next
structure instance, e.g. REGLER_B, as tag prefix, e.g. "REGLER_B.".
In Runtime, WinCC composes the names of the required structure tags from the following
elements:
Tag prefixes of the picture window
Names of the structure elements linked in the pictureTEMP_REGLER.PDL
Then the first picture window displays the state of regulator A and the second picture window
the state of regulator B.
Name conventions
When naming, you must respect certain conventions:
Note:
Tag names must be unique throughout the project. When tags are created, WinCC
does not distinguish between upper and lower case characters in a name.
Tag names must not be longer than 128 characters. In the case of structure tags, this
limit applies to the whole expression "structure tag name + dot + structure tag
element name".
There are certain characters which you cannot use in the names of structure types,
structre elements and structure tags. You will find the characters you must not include
in a name in the WinCC Information System at "Working with projects" > "Nonauthorized characters"
Note:
Tag groups
Definition
You can sort your tags into tag groups in Tag Management.
You create a tag group as a directory at "Internal tags" or at the connection of a channel unit.
Subgroups are not possible.
Usage
When creating a large number of tags in your project, you can combine them in groups
according to subject.
You can create, for example, a tag group for every picture in your project. You create the tags
you use in one of your pictures in the appropriate group.
In this way WinCC makes it easier for you to assign and retrieve tags.
Name conventions
The names of tag groups must be unique in the whole project. You must use a name
simultaneously for tags and tag groups. When tags and tag groups are created, WinCC does
not distinguish between upper and lower case characters in a name.
You must not use certain characters in the names of tag groups. You will find the characters
you must not include in a name in the WinCC Information System at "Working with projects"
> "Non-authorized characters"
Note:
Tag Selection Dialog Box

Working with the tag selection dialog box
WinCC opens the tag selection dialog box as soon as you want to attach a tag in an editor.
In Graphics Designer you can view the tag selection dialog box continuously. Call the option
"View" > "Toolbars..." on the menu bar. Select the check box next to the "Tags" entry.
In the Global Script editor, open the tag selection dialog box by choosing "Edit" > "Tag
Browser".
In the tag selection dialog box, you can view either all tags in the project or navigate in the
directory structure. You select a highlighted tag by clicking "OK".
Drag and drop

You can also connect a tag to an object or object attribute by means of drag and drop. With
drag and drop, there are two places above which you can store the tag:
Above an object in the picture
Above an attribute in the "Object Properties" dialog box, Properties tab
Store the tag above an attribute in the "Object Properties" dialog box, Properties tab. This
ensures that this attribute is dynamized by the tag.
The attribute having to be dynamized is fixed in the case of objects having a simplified
configuration dialog box. The table shows the objects and the dynamized attribute:
Object
Attribute
I/O field
Output value
Bar graph
Process driver connection
Status display
Current status
Text list
Output value
Check box
Selected boxes
Option box
Selected boxes
Slider object
Process driver connection
Filter
Using the filter function, you can reduce the selected number of tags or symbols so as to
search more efficiently.
When searching, you can use the placeholders "*" and "?". You can only use alphanumeric
characters when searching for names. WinCC saves the last 20 search criteria you entered.
Example
The following internal tags have been created in WinCC, for example: "var1"; "var2"; "var3";
"smv2" and "apm1". As a search criterion, enter "a*" and exit the filter function with the
<Tab> key. WinCC then shows all the tags whose name starts with "a". In this case, the tag
'apm1' in the 'List of all Tags' folder.
Note:
The search operation in the tag selection dialog box can take some time when there is a large
number of tags. Searching lasts about one minute with 15,000 tags.
It is sensible to arrive at a preselection in the tag selection dialog box by means of the filter.
Data source
This function is available when you are working with WinCC integrated in STEP 7.
In this box you can select the data source from which you would like to attach a tag.
"WinCC Tags" as data source
WinCC display all configured internal tags and process tags. You can create new tags by
means of the "Create a New Tag" function. You can edit existing WinCC tags with the "Edit
Tag" function.
Note:
In certain situations the tag selection dialog box sets a filter to the data type of the tag.
'ES Tags' as data source
WinCC displays all PCS 7 process tags. PCS7 process tags are all operable and visible CFC
and SFC modules which were configured in the PCS 7 Engineering System. "CFC" stands
for "Continuous Function Chart". "SFC" stands for "Sequential Function Chart". You can
update the attributes of the display tag by operating the "Update ES Tags" button. This is
necessary only when an attribute is modified in the PCS 7 Engineering System while the tag
selection dialog box is open. Attributes are items such as name, type or comment relating to a
process tag.
Further information on this is available in the Chapter "Integration in the SIMATIC
Manager" and in the "Process Control System PCS7 Operator Station" configuration manual.
"Update ES Tags" button
The
button is available to you after selecting the "ES tags" data source.
You can use this button to update the CFC/SFC connections. CFC/SFC stands for
"Continuous Function Chart/Sequential Function Chart". When you extend STEP 7
connections, you can update the corresponding engineering station with this function.
"STEP7 Symbols" as data source
WinCC displays all the inputs, outputs, and bit memories in the STEP 7 symbol list and all
the global data blocks. The symbol lists and the data blocks are created in SIMATIC
Manager. In this case, data blocks themselves cannot be mapped. Only the parameters of the
prevailing data block displayed in the data window can be mapped.
"Transfer Data" button
The
button is available to you after selecting the "STEP 7 Symbols" data source.
The "Transfer Data" function is used by WinCC to apply the selected symbols or parameters
of data blocks to the WinCC database.
Tag types
Introduction
When you create a tag, you assign one of the possible data types to the tag.
This data type depends on the type of data for which you would like to use the tag.
Note:
If you modify the data type of an existing process tag, the previously defined tag address is
deleted. This reason for this is that the PLC address changes when the data type is modified.
Adapt format
The data type of a tag in WinCC can differ from the data type used in the automation system.
You can then set that WinCC converts the data type of a tag for transfer to the automation
system.
Tag types with type conversion
Tag types without type conversion
Signed 8-bit value
Text reference
Binary tag
Signed 16-bit value
Signed 32-bit value
Raw data type
Structure types

Text reference
Definition
With tags having the "Text reference" data type, you refer to an entry in the WinCC Text
Library. You can only configure text references as internal tags.
You use text references, for example, when you want to display different blocks of text
alternately. You assign the corresponding text ID of the entry in the Text Library to the tag.
Creating a text reference
You create a tag with the "Text reference" data type as an internal tag.
In the "Tag Properties" dialog box, select the "Start value" check box on the Limits/Reporting
tab. Enter the text ID from the Text Library as the start value.
Note:
In a multi-user system, WinCC uses for text output the language of the computer on which
the text reference was created.
Adapt format
Type conversion does not take place for the "Text reference" data type.
Binary tag
Definition
The "Binary tag" data type corresponds to a bit. A binary tag can assume the values TRUE or
"0" and FALSE or "1".
The binary tag is stored as a byte on the system.
Note:
Some communication drivers cannot transfer single bits. The use of binary tags can result in
degraded performance with these communication drivers. Take note of the help for the
different communication drivers in the WinCC Information System at "Communication".
BIT
The "Binary tag" data type is also referred to as "Bit".
Adapt format
Type conversion does not take place for the "Binary tag" data type.
Signed 8-bit value

Definition
The "Signed 8-bit value" data type is one byte long and is signed (plus or minus).
Char/Signed Byte
The "Signed 8-bit value" data type is also referred to as "Char" or "Signed byte".
Adapt format
If you create a new tag with the "Signed 8-bit value" data type, the "Type Conversion" box
will display the "CharToSignedByte" by default. The range of numbers is -128 to +127.
The following type conversions are possible for the "Signed 8-bit value" data type:
Adapt format
Number range
CharToSignedByte
-128 to +127
(no conversion)
CharToUnsignedByte
0 to 127
CharToUnsignedWord
0 to 127
CharToUnsignedDword
0 to 127
CharToSignedWord
-128 to +127
CharToSignedDword
-128 to +127
CharToMSBByte
-128 to +127
CharToMSBWord
-128 to +127
CharToMSBDword
-128 to +127
CharToBCDByte
0 to 99
CharToBCDWord
0 to 127
CharToBCDDword
0 to 127
CharToSignedBCDByte
-9 to +9
CharToSignedBCDWord
-128 to +127
CharToSignedBCDDword
-128 to +127
CharToExtSignedBCDByte
-79 to +79
CharToExtSignedBCDWord
-128 to +127
CharToExtSignedBCDDword
-128 to +127
CharToAikenByte
0 to 99
CharToAikenWord
0 to 127
CharToAikenDword
0 to 127
CharToSignedAikenByte
-9 to +9
CharToSignedAikenWord
-128 to +127
CharToSignedAikenDword
-128 to +127
CharToExcessByte
0 to 99
CharToExcessWord
0 to 127
CharToExcessDword
0 to 127
CharToSignedExcessByte
-9 to +9
CharToSignedExcessWord
-128 to +127
CharToSignedExcessDword
-128 to +127

Definition
The "Unsigned 8-bit value" data type is one byte long and is not signed.
Byte/Unsigned byte
The "Unsigned 8-bit value" data type is also referred to as "byte" or "Unsigned byte".
Adapt format
If you create a new tag with the "Unsigned 8-bit value" data type, the "Type Conversion" box
will display the "ByteToUnsignedByte" by default. The range of numbers is 0 to 255.
The following type conversions are possible for the "Unsigned 8-bit value" data type:
Adapt format
Number range
ByteToUnsignedByte
0 to 255
(no conversion)
ByteToUnsignedWord
0 to 255
ByteToUnsignedDword
0 to 255
ByteToSignedByte
0 to 127
ByteToSignedWord
0 to 255
ByteToSignedDword
0 to 255
ByteToBCDByte
0 to 99
ByteToBCDWord
0 to 255
ByteToBCDDword
0 to 255
ByteToAikenByte
0 to 99
ByteToAikenWord
0 to 255
ByteToAikenDword
0 to 255
ByteToExcessByte
0 to 99
ByteToExcessWord
0 to 255
ByteToExcessDword
0 to 255
Signed 16-bit value

Definition
The "Signed 16-bit value" data type is two bytes long and is signed (plus or minus).
Short/Signed word
The "Signed 16-bit value" data type is also referred to as "Short" or "Signed word".
Adapt format
will display the "ShortToSignedWord" by default. The range of numbers is -32768 to
+32767.
Adapt format
Number range
ShortToSignedWord
-32768 to +32767
(no conversion)
ShortToUnsignedByte
0 to 255
ShortToUnsignedWord
0 to 32767
ShortToUnsignedDword
0 to 32767
ShortToSignedByte
-128 to +127
ShortToSignedDword
-32768 to +32767
ShortToMSBByte
-127 to +127
ShortToMSBWord
-32767 to +32767
ShortToMSBDword
-32768 to +32767
ShortToBCDByte
0 to 99
ShortToBCDWord
0 to 9999
ShortToBCDDword
0 to 32767
ShortToSignedBCDByte
-9 to +9
ShortToSignedBCDWord
-999 to +999
ShortToSignedBCDDword
-32768 to +32767
ShortToExtSignedBCDByte
-79 to +79
ShortToExtSignedBCDWord
-7999 to +7999
ShortToExtSignedBCDDword
-32768 to +32767
ShortToAikenByte
0 to 99
ShortToAikenWord
0 to 9999
ShortToAikenDword
0 to 32767
ShortToSignedAikenByte
-9 to +9
ShortToSignedAikenWord
-999 to +999
ShortToSignedAikenDword
-32768 to +32767
ShortToExcessByte
0 to 99
ShortToExcessWord
0 to 9999
ShortToExcessDword
0 to 32767
ShortToSignedExcessByte
-9 to +9
ShortToSignedExcessWord
-999 to +999
ShortToSignedExcessDword
-32768 to +32767

Definition
The "Unsigned 16-bit value" data type is two bytes long and is not signed.
Word/Unsigned word
The "Unsigned 16-bit value" data type is also referred to as "word" or "Unsigned word".
Adapt format
If you create a new tag with the "Unsigned 16-bit value" data type, the "Type Conversion"
box will display the "WordToUnsignedWord" by default. The range of numbers is 0 to
65535.
Adapt format
Number range
WordToUnsignedWord
0 to 65535
(no conversion)
WordToUnsignedByte
0 to 255
WordToUnsignedDword
0 to 65535
WordToSignedByte
0 to 127
WordToSignedWord
0 to 32767
WordToSignedDword
0 to 65535
WordToBCDByte
0 to 99
WordToBCDWord
0 to 9999
WordToBCDDword
0 to 65535
WordToAikenByte
0 to 99
WordToAikenWord
0 to 9999
WordToAikenDword
0 to 65535
WordToExcessByte
0 to 99
WordToExcessWord
0 to 9999
WordToExcessDword
0 to 65535
WordToSimaticCounter
0 to 999
WordToSimaticBCDCounter
0 to 999
Signed 32-bit value

Definition
The "Signed 32-bit value" data type is four bytes long and is signed (plus or minus).
Long/signed dword
The "Signed 32-bit value" data type is also referred to as "long" or "Signed dword".
Adapt format
will display the "LongToSignedDword" by default. The range of numbers is -2147483647 to
+2147483647.
Adapt format
Number range
LongToSignedDword
-2147483647 to +2147483647
(no conversion)
LongToUnsignedByte
0 to 255
LongToUnsignedWord
0 to 65535
LongToUnsignedDword
0 to 2147483647
LongToSignedByte
-128 to +127
LongToSignedWord
-32768 to +32767
LongToMSBByte
-127 to +127
LongToMSBWord
-32767 to +32767
LongToMSBDword
-2147483647 to +2147483647
LongToBCDByte
0 to 99
LongToBCDWord
0 to 9999
LongToBCDDword
0 to 99999999
LongToSignedBCDByte
-9 to +9
LongToSignedBCDWord
-999 to +999
LongToSignedBCDDword
-9999999 to +9999999
LongToExtSignedBCDByte
-79..+79
LongToExtSignedBCDWord
-7999 to +7999
LongToExtSignedBCDDword
-79999999 to +79999999
LongToAikenByte
0 to 99
LongToAikenWord
0 to 9999
LongToAikenDword
0 to 99999999
LongToSignedAikenByte
-9 to +9
LongToSignedAikenWord
-999 to +999
LongToSignedAikenDword
-9999999 to +9999999
LongToExcessByte
0 to 99
LongToExcessWord
0 to 9999
LongToExcessDword
0 to 99999999
LongToSignedExcessByte
-9 to +9
LongToSignedExcessWord
-999 to +999
LongToSignedExcessDword
-9999999 to +9999999
LongToSimaticTimer
10 to 9990000
LongToSimaticBCDTimer
10 to 9990000

Definition
The "Unsigned 32-bit value" data type is four bytes long and is not signed.
Dword /Unsigned dword

The "Unsigned 32-bit value" data type is also referred to as "dword" or "Unsigned dword".
Adapt format
If you create a new tag with the "Unsigned 32-bit value" data type, the "Type Conversion"
box will display the "DwordToUnsignedDword" by default. The range of numbers is 0 to
4294967295.
Adapt format
Number range
DwordToUnsignedDword
0 to 4294967295
(no conversion)
DwordToUnsignedByte
0 to 255
DwordToUnsignedWord
0 to 65535
DwordToSignedByte
0 to 127
DwordToSignedWord
0 to 32767
DwordToSignedDword
0 to 2147483647
DwordToBCDByte
0 to 99
DwordToBCDWord
0 to 9999
DwordToBCDDword
0 to 99999999
DwordToAikenByte
0 to 99
DwordToAikenWord
0 to 9999
DwordToAikenDword
0 to 99999999
DwordToExcessByte
0 to 99
DwordToExcessWord
0 to 9999
DwordToExcessDword
0 to 99999999
DwordToSimaticTimer
10 to 9990000
DwordToSimaticBCDTimer
10 to 9990000

Definition
The "Floating-point number 32-bit IEEE 754" data type is four bytes long and is signed (plus
or minus).
FLOAT
The "Floating-point number 32-bit IEEE 754" data tape is also referred to as "Float".
Adapt format
If you create a new tag with the "Floating-point number 32-bit IEEE 754" data type, the
"Type Conversion" box will display the "FloatToFloat" by default. The number range is +3.402823e+38.
Note:
For every "FloatTo...Dword" type conversion, only the first seven places are considered. The
Float data type only allows seven digits. If you have an S7 connection, the range of numbers
for the "FloatToFloat" type conversion is +-3.402823e+38.
The following type conversions are possible for the "Floating-point number 32-bit IEEE 754"
data type:
Adapt format
Number range
FloatToFloat
+-3.402823e+38
(no conversion)
FloatToUnsignedByte
0 to 255
FloatToUnsignedWord
0 to 65535
FloatToUnsignedDword
0 to 4.294967e+09
FloatToSignedByte
-128 to +127
FloatToSignedWord
-32768 to +32767
FloatToSignedDword
-2.147483e+09 to +2.147483e+09
FloatToDouble
+-3.402823e+38
FloatToMSBByte
-127 to +127
FloatToMSBWord
-32767 to +32767
FloatToMSBDword
-2.147483e+09 to +2.147483e+09
FloatToBCDByte
0 to 99
FloatToBCDWord
0 to 9999
FloatToBCDDword
0 to 9.999999e+07
FloatToSignedBCDByte
-9 to +9
FloatToSignedBCDWord
-999 to +999
FloatToSignedBCDDword
-9999999 to +9999999
FloatToExtSignedBCDByte
-79 to +79
FloatToExtSignedBCDWord
-7999 to +7999
FloatToExtSignedBCDDword
-7.999999e+07 to +7.999999e+07
FloatToAikenByte
0 to 99
FloatToAikenWord
0 to 9999
FloatToAikenDword
0 to 9,999999e+07
FloatToSignedAikenByte
-9 to +9
FloatToSignedAikenWord
-999 to +999
FloatToSignedAikenDword
-9999999 to +9999999
FloatToExcessByte
0 to 99
FloatToExcessWord
0 to 9999
FloatToExcessDword
0 to 9.999999e+07
FloatToSignedExcessByte
-9 to +9
FloatToSignedExcessWord
-999 to +999
FloatToSignedExcessDword
-9999999 to +9999999
FloatToS5Timer
10 to 9990000
FloatToS5Float
+-1.701411e+38
FloatToSimaticTimer
10 to 9990000
FloatToSimaticBCDTimer
10 to 9990000

Definition
The "Floating-point number 64-bit IEEE 754" data type is eight bytes long and is signed
(plus or minus).
DOUBLE
The "Floating-point number 64-bit IEEE 754" data tape is also referred to as "Double".
Adapt format
If you create a new tag with the "Floating-point number 64-bit IEEE 754" data type, the
"Type Conversion" box will display the "DoubleToDouble" by default. The number range is
+-1.79769313486231e+308.
Note:
For every "DoubleToFloat" type conversion, only the first seven places are considered. The
Float data type only allows seven digits.
The following type conversions are possible for the "Floating-point number 64-bit IEEE 754"
data type:
Adapt format
Number range
DoubleToDouble
+-1.79769313486231e+308
(no conversion)
DoubleToUnsignedByte
0 to 255
DoubleToUnsignedWord
0 to 65535
DoubleToUnsignedDword
0 to 4294967295
DoubleToSignedByte
-128 to +127
DoubleToSignedWord
-32768 to +32767
DoubleToSignedDword
-2147483647 to +2147483647
DoubleToFloat
+-3.402823e+38
DoubleToMSBByte
-127 to +127
DoubleToMSBWord
-32767 to +32767
DoubleToMSBDword
-2147483647 to +2147483647
DoubleToBCDByte
0 to 99
DoubleToBCDWord
0 to 9999
DoubleToBCDDword
0 to 99999999
DoubleToSignedBCDByte
-9 to +9
DoubleToSignedBCDWord
-999 to +999
DoubleToSignedBCDDword
-9999999 to +9999999
DoubleToExtSignedBCDByte
-79 to +79
DoubleToExtSignedBCDWord
-7999 to +7999
DoubleToExtSignedBCDDword
-79999999 to +79999999
DoubleToAikenByte
0 to 99
DoubleToAikenWord
0 to 9999
DoubleToAikenDword
0 to 99999999
DoubleToSignedAikenByte
-9 to +9
DoubleToSignedAikenWord
-999 to +999
DoubleToSignedAikenDword
-9999999 to +9999999
DoubleToExcessByte
0 to 99
DoubleToExcessWord
0 to 9999
DoubleToExcessDword
0 to 99999999
DoubleToSignedExcessByte
-9 to +9
DoubleToSignedExcessWord
-999 to +999
DoubleToSignedExcessDword
-9999999 to +9999999
DoubleToS5Timer
10 to 9990000
DoubleToS5Float
+-1.701411e+38
DoubleToSimaticTimer
10 to 9990000
DoubleToSimaticBCDTimer
10 to 9990000
Text tag 8-bit character set and Text tag 16-bit character set
Definition
Text tags are distinguished by the character set that has to be displayed:
With the "Text tag 8-bit character set" data type, each of the characters that has to be
displayed in this tag is one byte long. With the 8-bit character set, the ASCII character
set can be displayed for example.
With the "Text tag 16-bit character set" data type, each of the characters that has to be
displayed in this tag is two bytes long. You require a tag of this type to display the
Unicode character set, for example.
Process tag with the Text tag data type

For process tags with the "Text tag 8-bit character set" and "Text tag 16-bit character set"
data types, you must specify the length of the text tags. A text tag that is required to
accommodate 10 characters later must be ten long for the "8-bit character set" and 20 long
for the "16-bit character set".
Adapt format
There is no type conversion for the "Text tag 8-bit character set" and "Text tag 16-bit
character set" data types.
Raw Data Tag

Definition
External and internal "Raw data type" tags can be created in WinCC's Tag Management. The
format and the length of a raw data tag are not fixed. Its length can be in the range from 1 and
65535 bytes. It is either defined by the user or results from a specific application.
The contents of a raw data tag are not fixed. Only senders and receivers can interpret the
contents of a raw data tag. They are not interpreted by WinCC.
Note:
A raw data tag cannot be displayed within "Graphics Designer".
Potential applications within WinCC

Raw data tags can be used in the following modules within WinCC:
"Alarm Logging": For data exchange with the message blocks on the automation
system with message and acknowledgement processing of the message system.
"Global Script": In scripts for data exchange using the "Get/SetTagRaw" functions.
"Tag Logging": For process controlled archiving with process controlled tags in the
process value archive.
"User Archive": for transferring jobs, data, processing acknowledgements between

WinCC and the automation systems.
"Address Properties"
In the case of external Raw data tags the "Address Properties" dialog box is not identical for
all communication drivers, since the parameters of the tag address and the supported raw data
tag types depend on the communication driver being used.
Adapt format
Type conversion is not possible in WinCC for the "raw data type
External Tags
Introduction
WinCC tags are required to access specific data in an AS. These tags, which require a
connection to an AS, are referred to as external tags. Tags, which do not have a process
connection, are called internal tags.
Data Types and Type Conversion
When configuring external tags, in addition to the tag name, you must also specify a data
type and - for some data types - a type conversion:
The data type agrees with the data format in WinCC. Type conversion determines the
conversion from AS format to WinCC format. The type conversion applies in both
transmission directions:
in the AS: e.g. for certain functions (such as timer values / BCD displays) or via the
information to be addressed (such as byte address, word address in data block or I/O
range)
in WinCC: e.g. for analog values - for processing or calculating.
As a rule, the AS data format is fixed. There are then the following options for selecting the
WinCC format:
The WinCC data format can match the AS format. For this purpose, select the type
conversion, which uses the same format on both ends and considers the sign of the
WinCC data type, e.g. "WordToSignedWord". If this cannot be achieved with the
selected data type, change it in WinCC.
The WinCC format follows the value processing in WinCC.
You must observe the following points when selecting the data type and - if necessary - type
conversion:
Sign: Should it be considered in the conversion? Can negative tag values occur during
operation? (for example, when differences in regulation values are presented in
percent)
Value range: Do the tag values, which can occur in operation, all fall within the value
range available in each format or is it possible that the value could overflow the range
in WinCC or on the AS? In the event of an overflow, a value may not be possible to
display on the end or may lead to an error in the later processing.
Different type conversions with the same value range: It is possible that several
conversions of a data type may have the same value range, e.g.
"ByteToUnsignedDword" and "ByteToUnsignedWord" with the value range [0...127].
f In such cases you should always determine the format of the data on the AS and
check whether this format is not perhaps over-dimensioned and thus wasting
resources. (e.g. DWord instead of Word).
If the value range required in the AS is not covered by the selected type conversion, change
the data type in WinCC.
WinCC Data Types and Type Conversion
The following table shows which WinCC data types support type conversion.
Data Type
Binary Tag
Type Conversion
No
Unsigned 8-Bit Value
Yes
Signed 8-Bit Value
Yes
Yes
Signed 16-Bit Value
Yes
Yes
Signed 32-Bit Value
Yes
Floating-point Number 32-Bit IEEE 754
Yes
Floating-point Number 64-Bit IEEE 754
Yes
No
Text Tag 16-Bit Character Set
No
Raw data type
No
Note:
When using type conversions, make certain that the data sent from the AS can be interpreted
by WinCC within the selected type conversion. If the data cannot be interpreted by WinCC,
an error will be logged in the file "WinCC_sys_0x.log" in the directory
"..\Siemens\WinCC\Diagnose".
Linear Scaling of Numerical Tag Types
Linear scaling can be used with numerical data types. The value range of a value in a process
can be represented linearly in a specific value range of a WinCC tag.
As an example, a process could require that a nominal value be entered in the unit [bar],
while WinCC should permit the user to enter this value in [mbar]. Using linear scaling, the
value range in the process [0 ...1] can be converted to the value range [0 ...1000] of the
WinCC tag.
Setting Text Tag Lengths
You must set the length of tags with the data type "Text Tag 8-Bit Character Set" or "Text Tag
16-Bit Character Set". A text tag, which should later take 10 characters, must be assigned a
length of 10 in the case of an "8-Bit Character Set" or, in the case of a "16-Bit Character Set",
a length of 20.
Addressing in an Automation System
WinCC tags are assigned to data areas in the AS. They must addressed in a particular manner
in the AS. The type of addressing depends on the type of communication partner.
How to create a new connection

Introduction
External tags can only be created on the basis of a connection to an automation system. If the
necessary connection does not exist, it must first be created.
Prerequisites
The required communication processor and associated hardware driver must be

installed.
The desired communication driver must also be installed, e.g. "SIMATIC S7 Protocol
Suite".
Procedure
Expand the view of the communication driver in "Tag Management".
Select the desired channel unit, e.g. "PROFIBUS".
In the pop-up menu for the channel unit, select "New Driver Connection...".
On the "General" tabbed card, in the field "Name", enter a name for the connection that
is unique within the scope of the project.
Click on the "Properties" button to open the "Connection Parameters" dialog. Set the
parameters as required for this connnection. For further details, please refer to the HELP
documentation for the respective channel.
Close all of the dialogs by clicking on "OK".
Type conversions sorted by WinCC data type

Introduction
When configuring external tags, a type conversion must be performed for all numerical data
types.
The data format on the WinCC-side determines the data type. The type conversion defines
how the WinCC format will be converted to the AS format. This definition applies for
transfers in both directions.
Select the desired WinCC data type from the list. The table below will then list the supported
type conversions and value ranges.
WinCC Data Type
Type conversion
"Unsigned 8-Bit Value"
Value Range
ByteToUnsignedByte
0...255 (no conversion)
ByteToUnsignedWord
0...255
ByteToUnsignedDword
0...255
ByteToSignedByte
0...127
ByteToSignedWord
0...255
ByteToSignedDword
0...255
ByteToBCDByte
0...99
ByteToBCDWord
0...255
ByteToBCDDword
0...255
ByteToAikenByte
0...99
ByteToAikenWord
0...255
ByteToAikenDword
0...255
ByteToExcessByte
0...99
ByteToExcessWord
0...255
ByteToExcessDword
0...255
Type Conversion
"Signed 8-Bit Value"
Value Range
CharToUnsignedByte
CharToUnsignedWord
0...127
0...127
CharToUnsignedDword
0...127
CharToSignedByte
-128...+127 (no conversion)
CharToSignedWord
-128...+127
CharToSignedDword
-128...+127
CharToMSBByte
-128...+127
CharToMSBWord
-128...+127
CharToMSBDword
-128...+127
CharToBCDByte
0...99
CharToBCDWord
0...127
CharToBCDDword
0...127
CharToSignedBCDByte
-9...+9
CharToSignedBCDWord
-128...+127
CharToSignedBCDDword
-128...+127
CharToExtSignedBCDByte
-79...+79
CharToExtSignedBCDWord
-128...+127
CharToExtSignedBCDDword
-128...+127
CharToAikenByte
0...99
CharToAikenWord
0...127
CharToAikenDword
0...127
CharToSignedAikenByte
-9...+9
CharToSignedAikenWord
-128...+127
CharToSignedAikenDword
-128...+127
CharToExcessByte
0...99
CharToExcessWord
0...127
CharToExcessDword
0...127
CharToSignedExcessByte
-9...+9
CharToSignedExcessWord
-128...+127
CharToSignedExcessDword
-128...+127
Type Conversion
"Floating-point Number 64-Bit IEEE 754" Value Range
DoubleToDouble
DoubleToUnsignedByte
+-1.79769313486231e+308 (no conversion)

0...255
DoubleToUnsignedWord
0...65535
DoubleToUnsignedDword
0...4294967295
DoubleToSignedByte
-128...+127
DoubleToSignedWord
-32768...+32767
DoubleToSignedDword
-2147483647...+2147483647
DoubleToFloat
+-3.402823e+38
DoubleToMSBByte
-127...+127
DoubleToMSBWord
-32767...+32767
DoubleToMSBDword
-2147483647...+2147483647
DoubleToBCDByte
0...99
DoubleToBCDWord
0...9999
DoubleToBCDDword
0...99999999
DoubleToSignedBCDByte
-9...+9
DoubleToSignedBCDWord
-999...+999
DoubleToSignedBCDDword
-9999999...+9999999
DoubleToExtSignedBCDByte
-79...+79
DoubleToExtSignedBCDWord
-7999...+7999
DoubleToExtSignedBCDDword
-79999999...+79999999
DoubleToAikenByte
0...99
DoubleToAikenWord
0...9999
DoubleToAikenDword
0...99999999
DoubleToSignedAikenByte
-9...+9
DoubleToSignedAikenWord
-999...+999
DoubleToSignedAikenDword
-9999999...+9999999
DoubleToExcessByte
0...99
DoubleToExcessWord
0...9999
DoubleToExcessDword
0...99999999
DoubleToSigned ExcessByte
-9...+9
DoubleToSigned ExcessWord
-999...+999
DoubleToSigned ExcessDword
-9999999...+9999999
DoubleToS5Timer
10...9990000
DoubleToS5Float
+-1.701411e+38
Type conversion
Value Range
DwordToUnsignedDword
DwordToUnsignedByte

0...255
DwordToUnsignedWord
0...65535
DwordToSignedByte
0...127
DwordToSignedWord
0...32767
DwordToSignedDword
0...2147483647
DwordToBCDByte
0...99
DwordToBCDWord
0...9999
DwordToBCDDword
0...99999999
DwordToAikenByte
0...99
DwordToAikenWord
0...9999
DwordToAikenDword
0...99999999
DwordToExcessByte
0...99
DwordToExcessWord
0...9999
DwordToExcessDword
0...99999999
DwordToSimaticTimer
10...9990000
DwordToSimaticBCDTimer
10...9990000
Type Conversion
Value Range
"Floating-point Number 32-Bit IEEE 754"
FloatToFloat
FloatToUnsignedByte
+-3.402823e+38 (no conversion)

0...255
FloatToUnsignedWord
0...65535
FloatToUnsignedDword
0...4.294967e+09
FloatToSignedByte
-128...+127
FloatToSignedWord
-32768...+32767
FloatToSignedDword
-2.147483e+09...+2.147483e+09
FloatToDouble
+-3.402823e+38
FloatToMSBByte
-127...+127
FloatToMSBWord
-32767...+32767
FloatToMSBDword
-2.147483e+09...+2.147483e+09
FloatToBCDByte
0...99
FloatToBCDWord
0...9999
FloatToBCDDword
0...9.999999e+07
FloatToSignedBCDByte
-9...+9
FloatToSignedBCDWord
-999...+999
FloatToSignedBCDDword
-9999999...+9999999
FloatToExtSignedBCDByte
-79...+79
FloatToExtSignedBCDWord
-7999...+7999
FloatToExtSignedBCDDword
-7.999999e+07...+7.999999e+07
FloatToAikenByte
0...99
FloatToAikenWord
0...9999
FloatToAikenDword
0...9.999999e+07
FloatToSignedAikenByte
-9...+9
FloatToSignedAikenWord
-999...+999
FloatToSignedAikenDword
-9999999...+9999999
FloatToExcessByte
0...99
FloatToExcessWord
0...9999
FloatToExcessDword
0...9.999999e+07
FloatToSignedExcessByte
-9...+9
FloatToSignedExcessWord
-999...+999
FloatToSignedExcessDword
-9999999...+9999999
FloatToS5Timer
10...9990000
FloatToS5Float
+-1.701411e+38
Value Range
Type Conversion "Signed 32-Bit Value"
LongToSignedDword
LongToUnsignedByte
-2147483647...+2147483647 (no conversion)

0...255
LongToUnsignedWord
0...65535
LongToUnsignedDword
0...2147483647
LongToSignedByte
-128...+127
LongToSignedWord
-32768...+32767
LongToMSBByte
-127...+127
LongToMSBWord
-32767...+32767
LongToMSBDword
-2147483647...+2147483647
LongToBCDByte
0...99
LongToBCDWord
0...9999
LongToBCDDword
0...99999999
LongToSignedBCDByte
-9...+9
LongToSignedBCDWord
-999...+999
LongToSignedBCDDword
-9999999...+9999999
LongToExtSignedBCDByte
-79..+79
LongToExtSignedBCDWord
-7999...+7999
LongToExtSignedBCDDword
-79999999...+79999999
LongToAikenByte
0...99
LongToAikenWord
0...9999
LongToAikenDword
0...99999999
LongToSignedAikenByte
-9...+9
LongToSignedAikenWord
-999...+999
LongToSignedAikenDword
-9999999...+9999999
LongToExcessByte
0...99
LongToExcessWord
0...9999
LongToExcessDword
0...99999999
LongToSignedExcessByte
-9...+9
LongToSignedExcessWord
-999...+999
LongToSignedExcessDword
-9999999...+9999999
LongToSimaticTimer
10...9990000
LongToSimaticBCDTimer
10...9990000
Type
Conversion "Signed 16-Bit Value"
ShortToUnsignedByte
Value Range
ShortToUnsignedWord
0...255
0...32767
ShortToUnsignedDword
0...32767
ShortToSignedByte
-128...+127
ShortToSignedWord
-32768...+32767 (no conversion)
ShortToSignedDword
-32768...+32767
ShortToMSBByte
-127...+127
ShortToMSBWord
-32767...+32767
ShortToMSBDword
-32768...+32767
ShortToBCDByte
0...99
ShortToBCDWord
0...9999
ShortToBCDDword
0...32767
ShortToSignedBCDByte
-9...+9
ShortToSignedBCDWord
-999...+999
ShortToSignedBCDDword
-32768...+32767
ShortToExtSignedBCDByte
-79...+79
ShortToExtSignedBCDWord
-7999...+7999
ShortToExtSignedBCDDword
-32768...+32767
ShortToAikenByte
0...99
ShortToAikenWord
0...9999
ShortToAikenDword
0...32767
ShortToSignedAikenByte
-9...+9
ShortToSignedAikenWord
-999...+999
ShortToSignedAikenDword
-32768...+32767
ShortToExcessByte
0...99
ShortToExcessWord
0...9999
ShortToExcessDword
0...32767
ShortToSignedExcessByte
-9...+9
ShortToSignedExcessWord
-999...+999
ShortToSignedExcessDword
-32768...+32767
Type conversion
WordToUnsignedWord
Value Range
WordToUnsignedByte
0...255
WordToUnsignedDword
0...65535
WordToSignedByte
0...127
WordToSignedWord
0...32767
WordToSignedDword
0...65535
WordToBCDByte
0...99
WordToBCDWord
0...9999
WordToBCDDword
0...65535
WordToAikenByte
0...99
WordToAikenWord
0...9999
WordToAikenDword
0...65535
WordToExcessByte
0...99
WordToExcessWord
0...9999
WordToExcessDword
0...65535
WordToSimaticCounter
0...999
WordToSimaticBCDCounter
0...999
Create and edit tags.

Editing tags
Introduction
This chapter informs you of the possibilities of editing tags, tag groups and structure types:
Copy
Move
Delete
Rename
Editing in Runtime
Calling status information
Note:
If a tag was created in WinCC using SIMATIC Manager with "Translate OS", you cannot edit
the tag in WinCC Explorer.
Creating Internal Tags

Introduction
You use internal tags to transfer data within your project.
You can create internal tags in tag groups, too, or move them to tag groups once they have
been created.
Procedure
Procedure
1 In Tag Management of WinCC Explorer, open the "Internal Tags" directory.
2 Choose the "New Tag" option from the shortcut menu for the connection. The "Tag
Properties" dialog box opens.
3 At "Name" on the General tab, enter the name of the tag. In doing so, pay due consideration
to the name conventions in the chapter "Tag Management and Tags" > "Tags".
4 Set the data type.
5 On the Limits/Reporting tab, set limit values, limit values and the start value as necessary.
6 Click "OK" to exit the dialog box.
Note:
The "Project-wide update" and "Computer-local update" have no effect in most cases.
Internal tags you create on a server are always updated project-wide. Internal tags you create
on a WinCC client are always updated computer-locally.
The setting is only relevant when a client is configured without a local project.
How to configure an external tag

Introduction
The procedure for creating a tag is similar for nearly all data types.
However, special settings must be made for some data types (Steps 5 - 7).
Prerequisites
The required communication processor and hardware driver must be installed.

The desired communication driver must be installed, e.g. "SIMATIC S7 Protocol
Suite".
A connection must be set up using a channel unit (e.g. "PROFIBUS").
Procedure
In the pop-up menu for the desired connection, select "New Tag". The "Tag properties"
dialog will open.
On the "General" tabbed card, in the field "Name", enter a tag name that unique within
the scope of the WinCC project, e.g. "WinCC_01".
Set the tag's "Data Type", e.g. "Floating-point Number 64-Bit IEEE 754", in the
associated field.
Click on "Select" to open the "Tag properties" dialog and set the tag's address area in the
AS.
In the case of binary or 8-bit tags, if the channel does not support Bit/Byte access, the
"Bit/Byte Tag" dialog will be displayed before the "Tag properties" dialog.
For more information, please refer to "BinWrite Mechanism".
Close the "Bit/Byte Tag" or "Tag properties" dialog by clicking on "OK".
In the case of numerical tags, WinCC will display the recommended type conversion in
the "Type Conversion" field.
If your requirements are different, select the appropriate type conversion. The conversion
is presented in the order "X to Y", where X = WinCC Format and Y= AS Format, e.g.
"DoubleToDouble".
Tick the "Linear scaling" check box to have a numerical tag scaled linearly. Enter the
upper and lower limits for the "Process Value Range" (in the AS) and the "Tag Value
Range" (in WinCC).
When working with text tags, the "Length" field will be activated. In this case, enter the
length of the text tag in characters.
Click on "OK" to close all the dialogs.
Copying, moving and deleting tags

Introduction
The shortcut menu and the toolbar can be used to perform the following operations on tags,
tag groups and structure types:
Cut
Copy
Paste
Delete
There is no difference in the ways in which tags, tag groups and structure types behave.
You can select and edit several objects at a time in each case.
Copying, tags, tag groups and structure types
If, for example, you wish to configure several tags having the same properties, you can copy
an existing tag and paste it at the desired position. WinCC automatically increments the name
or adds a count to the name.
When you copy a tag group, WinCC automatically copies every tag contained in it.
Structure types can be copied separately. Structure tags and structure instances cannot be
copied separately but only while the associated structure type is being copied.
Examples
Original tag
Copied tag
VarOne
VarOne_1
VarOne_2
VarOne01
VarOne01_1
VarOne01_2
VarOne_01
VarOne_1
VarOne_2
VarOne_2
VarOne_3
VarOne_4
VarOne_5
VarOne_1
VarOne_3
VarOne_4
VarOne_7
(the values in between are not assigned)
VarOne_2
VarOne_5
VarOne_6
VarOne_8
Note:
If a tag was created in WinCC using SIMATIC Manager with "Translate OS", you cannot
copy or delete the tag in WinCC Explorer.
Moving tags and tag groups
If you want to move tags or tag groups, cut the object and paste it at the position you want.
You can move tags
from one tag group to another tag group

from the connection of a communication driver to under the connection of another
communication driver
from "Internal tags" Tag Management to under a communication driver
from the connection of a communication driver to the "Internal tags" Tag

Management
Structure types, structure tags and structure instances cannot be moved.

Note:
If you want to move a tag between the "Internal tags" Tag Management and a Variable or
between communication drivers, you must adjust the properties of the tag after doing so.
How to rename tags

Introduction
You can rename the following elements in Tag Management:
Tags
Tag groups
Structure types
Structure instance
Upper/lower case text

WinCC does not distinguish between upper and lower case characters when renaming.
Example
If you would like to change a lower case character to an upper case character in the tag name,
you have to rename the tag in a roundabout manner. If tag "Varone" should really be called
"VarOne", change the name first to "Varne" or "1Varone". You can then change the name a
second time to "VarOne".
Note:
Procedure
Procedure
1 Select a tag or a tag group.
2 Choose the "Properties" option from the shortcut menu.
The "Tag Properties" or the " Tag Group Properties" dialog box opens.
3 Modify the name of the tag or tag group. Pay due consideration to the name conventions
when doing so.
4 Click "OK" to exit the dialog box.

Alternative course of action
You can rename selected tags, tag groups and structure tags with F2.
Special features with structure types

Structure types and structure elements
If there are structure tags for a structure type in your project, you cannot rename either the
structure type itself or the structure elements contained in it. You must first delete all
associated structure instances and structure tags. After renaming, you must create the
necessary structure tags again.
Structure instances and structure tags
You can only rename structure tags by changing the name of the structure instance. You
cannot change the second part of the name, since it is defined by the corresponding structure
element.
You can directly rename structure instances. You will find the structure instance in WinCC
Explorer at "Structure Types" at the structure type being used. When you rename a structure
instance, all associated structure tags are renamed automatically.
Example
A structure instance "Furnace1" includes the structure tags "Furnace1.pressure_actual",
"Furnace1.pressure_set" and "Furnace1.temperature".
If you change the name of the structure instance to "Furnace_one", the structure tags will be
changed to "Furnace_one.pressure_actual", "Furnace_one.pressure_set" and
"Furnace_one.temperature".
Note:
Editing tags in Runtime

Introduction
If you have activated a project, you can edit tags in parallel. There are a few constraints,
however.
Editing in Runtime
You can edit the following elements in Runtime:
Tags
Tag groups
Structure types
Structure
instances
Create
Address
---
---
Cut
X 2)
---
---
---
Copy
X 2)
Paste
Delete
X 1) 2)
X 1)
---
X 3)
---
Modify properties X
Rename
X 1) 2)
1)
Possible with external tags only if the channel being used supports the function. This
currently applies only to the "SIMATIC S7 Protocol Suite" channel.
2)
Does not apply to structure tags.
3)
Not possible if structrue tags are created.
Note:
Status information of tags in Runtime

Introduction
In Runtime you can view information on connections and tags as a tooltip.
Displaying status information
In Tag Management of the activated project, change to the subdirectory you require.
If you point the mouse pointer to a connection or a tag in the data window, WinCC outputs
the status information as a tooltip.
Connections
The tooltip of a connection specifies:
The status of a connection
Tags
The tooltip of a tag specifies:
The status of a connection

The current process value of a tag
The quality code of a tag
The date on which a tag was last changed
This status display similarly applies to structure tags.

Quality codes
Quality codes provided encoded information about the status and quality of a tag.
You will find a list of quality codes in the WinCC Information System at "Communication" >
"Communication diagnostics" > "Quality codes of tags".
CHAPTER-IIi
Creating process pictures

How to use the Graphics Designer editor.
How to start the Graphics Designer
Introduction
The Graphics Designer can only be started for the project currently opened in the WinCC
Explorer.
Requirements
A project must be opened.
Procedure
The Graphics Designer can be opened in the following ways:
Navigation window of the WinCC Explorer

Select the command "Open" in the context-sensitive menu the "Graphics Designer"
entry.
The Graphics Designer is started and in new picture is opened.
Data window of the WinCC Explorer
Select the entry "Graphics Designer" in the navigation window. The pictures available
in the project are shown in the data window. Select the command "Open Picture" in
the context-sensitive menu of a picture.
The Graphics Designer is started and the selected picture is opened.
The Graphics Designer in the WinCC Explorer

Introduction
The Graphics Designer is an editor for creating process pictures and making them dynamic.
The Graphics Designer can only be started for the project currently opened in the WinCC
Explorer. The WinCC Explorer can be used to display an overview of the pictures available
in the current project.
For working with the Graphics Designer, the WinCC Explorer offers the following functions
and configuration options:
Starting Graphics Designer

Creating and renaming pictures
Configuring object libraries and ActiveX controls
Converting libraries and pictures from older program versions
Configuring and starting runtime
Starting Graphics Designer

Creating a New Picture window
In Graphics Designer, select "New picture" . A new picture window will be created with the
default settings.
The start screen of the Graphics Designer

Introduction
The Graphics Designer provides objects and tools for creating process pictures. Start the
Graphics Designer from the navigation window of the WinCC Explorer.
Layout of the Graphics Designer screen
The Graphics Designer is designed according to the Windows standard. The Graphics
Designer has a desktop, toolbar, menu bar, status bar and various palettes. When you open
the Graphics Designer, the screen with the default settings appears. As standard, a blank
picture is displayed (file format PDL). You can move the palettes and bars on the screen and
arrange them as you like.
Layout of the Graphics Designer screen
The toolbars
At "View", "Toolbars...", the following toolbars can be shown or hidden. In the default
setting, all toolbars, except for the tags, are shown.
Objects: for inserting Standard Objects, Smart Objects, Windows Objects and
Controls.
Styles: for changing the line type and thickness, and fill patterns.
Default: for creating and saving documents, activating the runtime etc.
Alignment: for aligning a number of objects.
Colors: for fast changes to the color of an object.
Font: for changing the font and font size, font color and border color.
Zoom: for stepless zooming in and out.
Status: for displaying the language setting and coordinates
Layers: for showing and hiding individual layers.
Dynamic Wizard: for making objects dynamic with pre-prepared C Actions.
Tags: for fast assignment of tags to objects that can be made dynamic.
Note:
To move the visible area in the case of large pictures, you can use the scroll bars in
accordance with the Windows standard.
The Graphics Designer provides additional operation options with the mouse wheel: click on
the mouse wheel. The mouse pointer changes and you can move the visible picture area
simply by moving the mouse.
Elements and basic settings of the Graphics Designer

Introduction
The Graphics Designer is a combination of a graphics program and a tool for representing
processes. Based on the Windows standard, the Graphics Designer provides functions for the
creation and dynamic modification of process pictures. The familiar Windows program
interface makes it easy to begin using the complex program. Direct Help provides fast
answers to questions. The user can set up (customize) an individual working environment.
This chapter contains information on the structure of the Graphics Designer, on the elements
and basic settings of the program.
The coordinate system of a process picture

Introduction
In the Graphics Designer, the basis for setting positions and specifying sizes is a twodimensional coordinate system. The two axes of the coordinate system, x-axis and y-axis, are
perpendicular to one another and intersect at the coordinate origin.
The coordinate origin lies with the coordinates (X = 0 / Y = 0) in the top left corner of the
desktop. Starting from the coordinate origin, the horizontal x-axis runs in positive direction
towards the right-hand border of the desktop. The vertical y-axis points in a positive direction
towards the lower border of the desktop. The X and Y values of the current position of the
mouse pointer are displayed in the status bar of the Graphics Designer. The values for X and
Y rise when the mouse pointer is moved from the top left to the bottom right on the desktop.
The coordinates are shown in pixels.
The position and size of objects of a picture are determined by the coordinates that an object
has in the coordinate system. For example, the position of the object origin is set by the
attributes "Position X" and "Position Y". The object origin therefore has the coordinates X =
"Position X" / Y = "Position Y". The values of these attributes describe the distance of the
object origin from the coordinate axes.
Definition of origin
The "origin" is the point of an area or of an object that serves as a reference point for
specifying position and size. For the creation of process pictures in the Graphics Designer,
the following reference points are of significance:
Coordinate origin
The "coordinate origin" is the top left corner of the desktop.
Coordinates: X = 0 / Y = 0
Picture origin
The "picture origin" is the top left corner of a process picture.
Coordinates: X = 0 / Y = 0
If the picture is not displayed on the desktop as a window but rather is maximized, the picture
origin is the same as the coordinate origin.
Object origin
The "object origin" is the top left corner of the rectangle surrounding the object.
Coordinates: X = "Position X" / Y = "Position Y"
The Standard Toolbar

Introduction
The default setting is such that the standard toolbar is located beneath the menu bar of the
Graphics Designer. The buttons of the standard toolbar include both common Windows
commands such as "save" and "Copy" and special buttons of the Graphics Designer such as
"Runtime".
The standard toolbar can be shown or hidden using "View", "Toolbars". To the left of the
toolbar is a 'gripper', which can be used to move the bar to any position on the screen.
The Object Palette

Introduction
The Object Palette contains different types of objects that are frequently required in process
pictures.
The Object Palette can be shown or hidden using "View", "Toolbars". The Object Palette can
be moved to any position on the screen.
Contents
There are the following object groups:
Standard Objects: e.g. line, polygon, ellipse, circle, rectangle, static text
Smart Objects: e.g. application window, picture window, I/O field, bars, status display
Windows Objects: e.g. button, check box, option group, slider object
Controls: The 'Controls' tab contains as standard a selection of the most important
ActiveX controls provided by WinCC. Other controls can be linked.
You can read about how to configure the Object Palette yourself in the chapter
"Configuring object selection".
The Style Palette

Introduction
The Style Palette enables fast changes to line type, line weight, line ends and fill patterns.
The Style Palette can be shown or hidden using "View", "Toolbars". The Style Palette can be
moved to any position on the screen.
Contents
The style group "Line Type" contains different line display options such as dashed,
dotted etc.
The style group "Line Weight" sets the thickness of the line. The line weight is
specified in pixels.
The style group "Line Ends" enables display of the ends of lines as arrows or
rounded, for example.
The style group "Fill Pattern" provides the possibility to display closed objects with,
for example, a transparent or checkered background.
Displaying the current setting

If an object has been selected, the style properties of this object are shown in a bold font.
The Dynamic Wizard

Introduction
The Dynamic Wizard provides a large number of predefined C Actions to support

configuration of frequently recurring processes. The C Actions are sorted in topics in the
form of tabs. The content of the individual tabs can vary depending on the selected object
type.
The Dynamic Wizard can be shown or hidden using "View", "Toolbars". The Dynamic
Wizard can be moved to any position on the screen.
You will find a detailed description of this topic in the chapter "Making process pictures
dynamic".
The Alignment Palette

Introduction
The functions of the Alignment Palette can be used to process a number of objects together.
The functions can also be starting from the "Arrange / Align" menu.
The Alignment Palette can be shown or hidden using "View", "Toolbars". To the left of the
Alignment Palette is a 'gripper', which can be used to move the palette to any position on the
screen.
The Alignment Palette contains the following functions for processing the objects in a
multiple selection:
Requirements
At least two objects must be selected.
Overview
Buttons
Function
Align:
The selected objects are aligned left, right, up or down.

The type of selection determines which object is used as reference for
alignment.
If the objects have been selected using a selection frame (lasso) with the
mouse, the object located the furthest towards the outside is used as
reference. If the objects have been selected using the pressed <SHIFT> key
and the left-hand mouse button, the first selected object is used as
reference.
Center:
The selected objects are aligned horizontally or vertically.
The reference is the shared center axis of the selected objects, independent
of the type of selection.
Space:
The selected objects are spaced horizontally or vertically. The location of
the outer objects remains unchanged. The individual objects are evenly
spaced in relation to one another.
Match width or height:
The width or height of the selected objects is matched.
The type of selection determines which object is used as reference for
matching.
If the objects have been selected using a selection frame (lasso) with the
mouse, the object with the largest width or height is used as reference. If
the objects have been selected using the pressed <SHIFT> key and the lefthand mouse button, the first selected object is used as reference.
Match width and height:
The width and height of the selected objects are matched.
The reference object is the first configured object in the multiple selection.
The Layer Palette

Introduction
In order to simplify the processing of individual objects in complex process pictures, the
Graphics Designer allows you to work with layers. For example, the contents of a process
picture can be distributed across up to 32 layers. These layers can be shown or hidden
individually; in the default setting, all layers are visible; the active layer is Layer 0.
The Layer Palette can be shown or hidden using "View", "Toolbars". To the left of the palette
is a 'gripper', which can be used to move the palette to any position on the screen.
Example: Layers 0 and 1 are displayed, all other layers are hidden. The active layer is Layer
1; this has been renamed to "Compressor".
Making layers visible / invisible
Pressed buttons indicate the visible layers. Click on a button to make the layer visible or
invisible.
Active layer
The active layer can be set in the dropdown list box of the Layer Palette.
Renaming layers
You name layers in the "Settings..." menu in the "Visible Layers" tab. Double-click on a
layer; you can then enter a new name.
Assigning objects to layers
The assignment of an object to a layer can be changed in the "Object Properties" window.
The Zoom Palette

Introduction
Alongside the buttons for zooming in the Standard Toolbar, the Graphics Designer provides a
separate Zoom Bar. This enables very convenient zooming in a process picture.
On the left side of the Zoom Bar is a slider for finely graded setting of the zoom factor. To
the right of this are buttons with predefined zoom factors. The currently set zoom factor is
displayed below the slider in %.
The Zoom Palette can be shown or hidden using "View", "Toolbars". The Zoom Palette can
be moved to any position on the screen.
Notes
The minimum and maximum zoom factors can be defined individually for all layers. For
example, you can set the detail displays on a separate layer and show it only as of a certain
zoom factor, see chapter "Showing / Hiding tab dialogs".
To move the visible area in the case of a high zoom factor, you can use the scroll bars in
accordance with the Windows standard.
The Graphics Designer provides additional operation options with the mouse wheel: click on
the mouse wheel. The mouse pointer changes and you can move the visible picture area
simply by moving the mouse.
The Color Palette

Introduction
Depending on the selected object, the Color Palette enables fast changes to the line or fill
color. It provides 16 standard colors and the bottom button provides the option of selecting a
base color or a user-defined color.
A mouse-click on a color of the palette has the following effect, for example:
In the case of closed objects (e.g. rectangle), the fill color is changed.
In the case of open objects (e.g. polyline), the line color is changed.
In the case of text objects, the background color is changed.
If no object has been selected, the selected color is assigned to the background of the active
process picture.
The button covers the "Colors" dialog. This provides 48 base colors as well as the
possibility to create user-defined colors. For more information, read the chapter "Creating
user-defined colors".
The Color Palette can be shown or hidden using "View", "Toolbars"; it can be moved to any
position on the screen.
The Font Palette

Introduction
The most important text characteristics are easy to change using the Font Palette. The Font
Palette enables changes to the font, font size, font color and line color.
The Font Palette can be shown or hidden using "View", "Toolbars"; it can be moved to any
position on the screen.
Other text characteristics such as text in italics or bold print are set in the Object Properties
window.
Note:
The default settings of text characteristics can be changed for any text object. You can change
the default settings via the object properties, see chapter "The basic settings of the Graphics
Designer". Or you change the default settings via the Font Palette: First select a text object in
the Object Palette, then change the properties in the Text Palette and insert the text object.
The changed text characteristics then apply to all other objects of the same type.
The Tag Palette

Introduction
The Tag Palette enables fast linking of process tags to objects.
The Tag Palette can be shown or hidden using "View", "Toolbars". The Tag Palette can be
moved to any position on the screen. The default setting is that the Tag Palette is hidden.
Contents
The Tag Palette has the same layout as an Explorer window. The Tag Palette contains a list of
all of the tags available in the project as well as a list of the internal tags. Filters can be set,
the view can be changed, and an update of the connections is possible.
With the mouse button pressed, the tags in the right-hand window can be dragged to
attributes of an object in the "Object Properties" window.
The status bar

Introduction
The status bar is laid out in accordance with the Windows standard and it contains useful
information.
The status bar can be shown or hidden using "View", "Toolbars".
The basic settings of the Graphics Designer

Introduction
The following basic settings of the Graphics Designer can be customized:
Displaying and setting the grid

Displaying and setting the menu and the toolbars
Visibility and zoom factors of the individual layers
Default objects configuration
General settings and options
Opening the "Settings" window

In the menu bar, select "Extras" and click on "Settings...". The window with the tabs for the
various setting options opens.
Alternatively, you can also open the window using the entries "Grid" or "Layers" in the
"View" menu.
How to set the grid

Introduction
To enable exact work, you can make a background grid appear. If required, you can enable
the option "Snap to grid". Then, all objects that are created or moved are automatically
aligned to the grid.
Showing the grid and aligning to the grid can be set via the Standard Toolbar. The grid width
is set via the basic settings of the Graphics Designer.
The set grid properties are saved with the process picture. When a new picture is created, the
default settings of the program are used once again.

various setting options opens. Click on the "Grid" tab.
Alternatively, you can also open the window using the entries "Grid" or "Layers" in the
"View" menu.
Snap to grid
If the check box is enabled, objects are aligned to the grid points when they are created,
inserted and moved. Objects that have already been created are only aligned to the grid when
they are moved.
Display grid
When the check box is enabled, the grid points are shown.
Width in pixels
Horizontal spacing of the grid points. Maximum spacing: 100 pixels
Height in pixels
Vertical spacing of the grid points. Maximum spacing: 100 pixels
With a large grid width, objects are aligned to the left or upper grid points, as the case may
be.
All grid properties can be changed in the "Object Properties" window of the active process
picture. The color of the grid can also be changed there.
Note:
The minimum grid spacing that can be displayed on the screen is 10 pixels. If you want to set
a smaller value, you can align objects to this grid. On the screen, however, the grid spacing
displayed is the first multiple of the grid value that is greater than or equal to ten.
Example: You set 6 pixels as grid spacing; a grid or 12 pixels is shown on the screen. Objects
can be placed on one grid point or between two grid points.
Managing the default settings of objects

Introduction
In the Graphics Designer, the various object types have default properties. If an object from
the Object Palette is inserted in a picture, the object adopts these default settings.
Working with default objects
The default setting for the individual object types can be adapted as required. Ideally, the
default settings should be adapted before you begin creating a process picture. In this way,
the extent of later adaptations, for example for frequently used objects, can be limited.
If you are illustrating a complex process and require a great many process pictures with the
same object settings, it is recommended that you create a "master picture". You define the
object settings in this master and use it as a template for all individual process pictures.
All the information on default setting for object types is contained in a file of the format
PDD. As standard, the file "Default.pdd" is in the graphic folder "GraCS" of each project.
You can use the "Default Objects Configuration" tab in the "Settings" dialog to select the
following options for default settings of object types:
The default settings can be saved immediately or also automatically on exiting from
the Graphics Designer.
The default settings of another project can be loaded into the current project.
The file name and the directory path for storing the PDD file can be changed.

various setting options opens. Click on the "Default Objects Configuration" tab.
Saving default settings of objects
Procedure
1
In the "File" field, click on the button

The "Default Objects" dialog is opened.
Select the PDD file in which you want to save the changes and confirm your selection
with "OK".
As standard, the PDD file of a project is stored in the graphic folder "GraCS".
In the "Save" field, click on the "Save Now" button.

The changed default settings are saved in the selected PDD file.
Enable the "Save Configuration on Exit" check box if you want the default object
configuration to be saved when you exit from the Graphics Designer.
Loading default settings of objects
Procedure
1
In the "File" field, click on the button

.
Select the PDD file you want to load and confirm your selection with "OK".
As standard, the PDD file of a project is stored in the graphic folder "GraCS".
Click on the "Load Now" button.

The default objects configuration is imported from the selected PDD file into the current
project.
You can now save the loaded default settings in the current project directory:
click in the "File" field on the button
.
Select the PDD file of the current project and confirm your selection with "OK".
In the "Save" field, click on the "Save Now" button.

The imported default setting of the objects are saved in the PDD file of the current
project.
Note:
The default settings for objects do not apply across all projects. The changed default settings
only apply to the images of the currently opened WinCC project. The basic settings of the
Graphics Designer are not changed here.
Changing the default trigger

Introduction
The set trigger specifies the update cycle in runtime. Each attribute of an object that has been
made dynamic can be assigned an individual update cycle. The value you specify for the
default trigger is the default update cycle for all objects. If, for example, you want to have a
lot of objects updated in a cycle of 2 seconds, set the default trigger to 2 s. You then no
longer need to change the trigger setting for tag connection of the individual attributes.
various setting options opens. Click on the "Default Objects Configuration" tab.
Selecting the default trigger

Open the dropdown list box and select a value.
Picture cycle
A cyclic trigger is used as the trigger. The cycle time is defined by the object property Update
Cycle of the picture object. This cycle provides the option of centrally defining the cycles of
all the actions, tag connections and dynamic dialogs configured in a picture.
Window cycle
A cyclic trigger is used as the trigger. The cycle time is defined by the object property Update
Cycle of the Picture Window object. This value applies to all actions, tag connections and
dynamic dialog boxes used in the picture window which are configured with the trigger type
"Window Cycle".
Upon change
This trigger updates the object every time a change is made. In the case of external tags, there
might be a brief delay; internal tags lead to an immediate update.
Time values (250 ms - 1 h)

This trigger updates the object in the set cycle.
User cycle (1 - 5)
You can set this trigger any way you like.
To define user cycles:
1. Click in the navigation window of the WinCC Explorer with the right-hand mouse
button on the project (top entry).
2. In the context-sensitive menu, select the entry "Properties".
3. Select the "Update Cycles" tab.
4. Select one of the user cycles and redefine it.
You have to restart the Graphics Designer to make your individual user cycles available.
Note:
The shorter the set update cycles, the higher the system load. To prevent an overload, the
update should not take place more often than necessary.
Working with Pictures

Introduction
In Graphics Designer, a picture is a file in the form of a sheet of drawing paper. The size of
the drawing sheet can be adjusted. A drawing sheet has 32 layers, which can be used to
improve the organization of the drawing. The files are saved in the project directory, GraCS,
in the PDL format. The complete process can be distributed over several individual pictures,
which are linked together. Calls to other applications and files can also be included in a
process picture.
The more complex the configured process is, the more detailed the planning should be.
Project Planning Notes
Plan the structure of the representation of the process: determine how many pictures
will be needed and their hierarchical order.
Example: subprocesses can be shown in individual pictures, which are then merged
in a main picture.
Plan the navigation within a picture and between the individual pictures: the operation
sequences, buttons and hotkeys should be consistent in all pictures.
Create a Master picture in which the picture properties, default settings and object
settings are defined. This Master picture should then be used as the template for each
individual picture.
Take advantage of the program functions: Process pictures can be efficiently created
by using libraries, copying and transferring properties and by working with layers and
multiple pictures.
To avoid changes in the picture layout, make certain that each picture is displayed during the design phase - at the same size that it later will be displayed on the target
computer.
To avoid changes in the picture layout, make certain that you only use fonts that are
also available on the target computer.
How to create a new picture

Introduction
Depending on the selected method of working, you will either create a new picture using the
default settings or take your Master picture and save this under a new file name. The
advantage of working with a Master picture is that all of the changes that you make while
creating it will then kept consistently throughout the project.
Creating a New Picture
In Graphics Designer, either select "New" in the "File" menu or click on the Windows
symbol
. A new picture will be created with the default settings.
You can also create a new picture by using the pop-up menu in WinCC Explorer's navigation
window.
How to save the pictures

Introduction
Files are saved in Graphics Designer in the usual Windows manner.
Procedure
To save an active picture, click on

, select "Save" in the "File" menu or press the
key-combination <CTRL+S>.
To save the active picture under a new file name, select "Save As" in the "File" menu.
To save all of the open pictures, select "Save All" in the "File" menu.
How to open a picture

Introduction
Picture files are opened in Graphics Designer in the usual Windows manner.
Open Picture
In Graphics Designer, click on the button
PDL format file.
or select "Open" in the "File" menu. Select a
You can also open a picture in WinCC Explorer by double-clicking on a PDL format file.
This will start Graphics Designer, if necessary, and then open the picture.
Note:
Pictures may only be opened and edited in Graphics Designer. Pictures may not be opened in
Windows Explorer or any similar program.
How to Copy the Picture

Introduction
If you want to transfer the settings that you have made in a picture to another one, simply
save the old picture under a different name and delete or change the new picture's contents.
Saving a picture under a different name
In the "File" menu, select "Save As..." and then enter a new file name in the "Save As" dialog
box.
Note
It is not possible to copy a picture and then insert it with a different file name in WinCC
Explorer. To accomplish this, use Windows Explorer.
If you copy a picture created with the SIMATIC Manager using "Save As", you may rename
or delete this copy in WinCC Explorer. This also applies to pictures created in WinCC and
imported into SIMATIC Manager by using the function "Import WinCC Object.
How to Rename a Picture

Introduction
A picture can only be renamed in WinCC Explorer.
Naturally, you can save picture under a different name, but the picture will still be found with
the old file name in the project directory.
Rename Picture
Close the picture that you want to rename.
Afterwards, activate WinCC Explorer and right click on the picture.
In the pop-up menu, select "Rename picture" and enter the desired new name.
Note
If you create pictures using the SIMATIC Manager, these cannot be renamed in WinCC
Explorer. This also applies to pictures created in WinCC and imported into SIMATIC
Manager by using the function "Import WinCC Object.
How to Delete a Picture

Introduction
A picture can only be deleted in WinCC Explorer.
Delete Picture
Close the picture that you want to delete.
Afterwards, activate WinCC Explorer and right click on the picture.
In the pop-up menu, select "Delete picture" and confirm by clicking on "OK".
Note
If you create pictures using the SIMATIC Manager, these cannot be deleted in WinCC
Explorer. This also applies to pictures created in WinCC and imported into SIMATIC
Manager by using the function "Import WinCC Object.
How to set the picture properties

Introduction
In Graphics Designer, a process picture is treated as an object and is called a Picture Object.
It has properties and can be dynamized. The properties and dynamics of the picture can be
adjusted at any time. If no object has been selected in the picture, the "Object Properties"
window will display the properties of the Picture Object.
Procedure
Procedure
1
If the properties of a picture should be changed, make certain that no objects has been
selected. Open the "Object Properties" window by clicking on
in the toolbar. As an
alternative, the "Object Properties" window can also be opened via the pop-up menu or
by selecting "Properties" in the "View" menu.
Check whether the picture's properties are shown: The entry "Picture Object" must be
displayed in the object type field at the top of the window. The picture's file name will be
shown in the drop-down list at the right.

3
The attributes, which are found by clicking on the "Properties" or "Event" tabs, can be
changed like the attributes of an object. For more information, please see the chapter
entitled "Change Attributes".
Working with objects

Introduction
This chapter explains
which basic functions the Graphics Designer offers for working with objects
which characteristics the individual objects possess
how to use objects to create process pictures
how to change object properties as specified
Objects of the Object Palette

In the Graphics Designer the predefined graphic elements which enable efficient creation of
process pictures are called "objects" in the Graphics Designer. All objects can be easily
inserted into a picture from the object palette. The "Default" register tab of the Object Palette
provides the objects in the following object groups:
Standard Objects
Smart Objects
Windows Objects
Line
Polygon
Polyline
Ellipse
Circle
Ellipse Segment
Pie Segment
Ellipse Arc
Circular Arc
Rectangle
Rounded Rectangle
Static Text
Connector
Application Window
Picture Window
Control
OLE Element
Both
Bar
Graphic Object
Status Display
Text List
3D-Bar
Group Display
Button
Check Box
Option Group
Round Button
Slider
Combined Objects
The objects of the object palette can be combined by creating a "group" or a "user object"
from a multiple selection. Additionally a multiple selection or a combined object can be
added to the project library and can be made available as a "library object" for reuse in other
process pictures or projects.
How to change the default setting of object types

Introduction
In the Graphics Designer, the various object types have default properties. If an object from
the Object Palette is inserted in a picture, the object adopts these default settings.
The default setting for the individual object types can be adapted as required. Ideally, the
default settings should be adapted before you begin creating a process picture. In this way,
the extent of later adaptations, for example for frequently used objects, can be limited.
There is an extensive description on backing up default settings in the chapter The" Graphics
Designer Basic Settings".
Requirements
A picture must be opened. This picture can, but does not have to contain objects.
Procedure
This section shows the general procedure to view the default setting for the object types.
Changing the default properties is based on changing the individual attributes of an object.
There is an extensive description on changing attributes can be found in the chapter "The
Properties of an Object".
Procedure
1
Right-click the object palette on the the object type whose default setting you want to
change.
Select "Properties" in the popup menu.

The "Object Properties" window opens.
The name if the object type with the additional "Default" is displayed toolbar of this
window.
On the "Properties" tab select the property group which contains the attribute you want to
change.
Changing attributes in described extensively in the section "Attribute".
Note:
The default setting for the object types applies across the project. The changed default
settings only apply to the images of the currently opened WinCC project. The basic settings
of the Graphics Designer are not changed here.
Basic static operations

Introduction
To create a process picture, the required objects must be inserted from the Graphics Designer
object palette into a picture. These objects are then dynamically linked suitably to a process
to use the process picture to control and monitor processes.
This chapter introduces the basic static operations with which objects are inserted and
arranged in the picture.
How to insert an object in a picture

Introduction
The objects which should form a process and a subprocess in a process picture are inserted
from the Graphics Designer object palette into a picture.
In the Graphics Designer, the various object types have default properties. When they are
inserted the objects import these default properties (except for individual geometric
properties). After insertion the properties of an object can be modified. In the same way the
default settings for the object types can be modified as required.
When inserting an object, an object name is automatically assigned. The name of the object
type is linked with a continuous number as the object name. No special characters are used in
the object name. You change the object name using the "Object Name attribute".
Requirements
The Object Palette display must be enabled.
Procedure
The example of the standard object "Rectangle" is used here to show the general procedure as
to how to insert an object in a picture. Some object types require further steps to be carried
out. More information on these subsequent steps can be found in the extensive description of
the individual objects.
Procedure
1
Open the picture into which you want to insert an object.
In the object palette click the "Rectangle" standard object.
Position the cursor on the picture where you want to insert the rectangle.
The mouse pointer changes into a crosshair with an object symbol attached.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the rectangle to the required size.
As soon as you release the mouse button, the rectangle in inserted.
Alternative Operation
Double-click the required object in the object palette. The new object is inserted close to the
picture origin. The properties of the new object correspond to the default settings for the
selected object type.
How to change the object name

Introduction
The "Object Name" attribute specifies the name of an object in the picture. The object name
is unique within a picture. The name of the object is used for example in configuring C
actions to call the object.
When an object is inserted, the object name assigned as standard is the description of the
object type with a consecutive number. This name can be changed using the "Object Name"
attribute.
Note:
Avoid special characters in object names of these object names are used in scripts.
Requirements
Select any type of object.
Procedure
Procedure
1
Open the "Object Properties" window.
On the "Properties" tab select the entry for the selected object type to which the property
groups of the object are subordinate.
Double-click the object name "Attribute".

The "Text Input" dialog box opens.
Enter the new name.
Confirm by clicking "OK".
How to select an object

Introduction
To change the properties of an object, the object must be selected.
Requirements
The active picture must contain at least one object.
Procedure
Procedure
1
Position the cursor on the required object.
Click the object.

The mouse pointer changes into a crosshair with arrow ends.
The selection markers of the rectangle surrounding the object are shown.
Procedure
1
Open the "Object Properties" window.
On the toolbar of the window, open the drop-down list field to select the object.
Select the required object.

The selection markers are shown.
How to position objects

Introduction
The position of an object is defined by the coordinates of the object origin. The left upper
corner of the rectangle surrounding the object is called the object origin.
Objects can be positioned by:
dragging the object to a new position

moving the selected object with the aid of the arrow keys for cursor control
Changing the "Position X" and "Position Y attributes"
Multiple selection
It is possible to move several selected objects simultaneously.
Requirements
Procedure
Procedure
1
Position the cursor on the selected object.

The mouse pointer changes into a crosshair with arrow ends.
Click the object and hold down the left mouse button.
The cursor changes into an arrow with an outline icon (small rectangle with broken line).
Move the cursor.

The rectangle surrounding the object is displayed as broken and shows a possible new
position for the object.
The object initially maintains its original position.
Release the mouse button.

The object is moved to the position previously displayed by the broken line of the
rectangle surrounding the object.
The mouse pointer again changes into a crosshair with arrow ends.
Move the selected object using the arrow keys for cursor control or change the value for the
geometric "Position X" and "Position Y" attributes in the "Object Properties" window.
Note:
In the settings of the Graphics Designer if the "Snap to grid" function is activated, the object
can only be positioned with the mouse according to the settings for the grid.
How to scale an object

Introduction
The size of an object is defined by the geometry of the rectangle surrounding the object. The
rectangle surrounding the object is symbolized when selecting an object by showing the
selection markers.
Objects can be scaled by:
dragging the selection marker to a new position
changing the values of the "Width" and "Height" attributes
Multiple selection
It is not possible to scale several selected objects simultaneously using the mouse. To do this,
the objects must be grouped.
Requirements
Procedure
Procedure
Position the cursor on the selection marker of the selected object.
The cursor changes into a double arrow. The alignment of the double arrow indicates the
directions in which you can move the selection marker:
"Horizontal double arrow"

The handles on the horizontal center axis can be used to change the width of the
object.
"Vertical double arrow"
The handles on the vertical center axis can be used to change the height of the
object.
"Diagonal double arrow"
The handles on the corners of the objects can be used to change the height and
width of the object.
Drag the handles using the mouse to the required position.

In the settings of the Graphics Designer if the "Snap to grid" function is activated, the
object can only be scaled with the mouse according to the settings for the grid.
Change the values for the geometric "Width" and "Height" attributes in the "Object
Properties" window.
How to mirror the objects

Introduction
Objects can be mirrored on their horizontal or vertical middle axis. The mirroring of an
object can cause its geometric attributes to change. Mirroring can also change the alignment
of elements contained in the object such as text or checkboxes.
Multiple selection
It is possible to mirror several selected objects simultaneously. The mirroring occurs on the
horizontal or vertical middle axis of the individual objects.
Requirements
Select any type of object except circle, application window, picture window, Control,
OLE object, status display, 3D bars, group display and round button.
Procedure
Click the icon on the "Standard toolbar"
to mirror the selected object on its horizontal middle axis
to mirror the selected object on its vertical middle axis
Alternatively you can use the entries "Horizontal" and "Vertical" on the "Arrange / Mirror" menu.
How to rotate the objects

Introduction
Objects can be rotated around their center point. The rotation is clockwise and in steps of 90
degrees.
The rotation of an object can cause its geometric attributes to change. Rotation can also
change the alignment of elements in an object such as a text.
Multiple selection
It is possible to rotate several selected objects simultaneously. The objects are each rotated
around their center point.
Requirements
Select any type of object except circle, application window, picture window, Control,
OLE object, status display, 3D bars, group display and round button.
Procedure
In the "Standard toolbar" click the icon

point.It rotates 90 degrees.
to rotate the object clockwise around its center
Alternatively you can select on the "Arrange "menu the "Rotate entry".
How to delete objects

Introduction
The "Delete" command removes a selected object from a picture.
Multiple selection
It is possible to delete several selected objects simultaneously.
Requirements
Procedure
Press <DEL> to remove the selected object from the picture.
Alternatively you can use the "Delete" entry on the popup menu or on the "Edit" menu.
Note:
You can easily correct operating steps unintentionally carried out:
Click the button
on the Standard toolbar to undo the last action. You can undo the last 30
editing steps by repeatedly clicking this button.
Use the button
on the Standard toolbar to restore the last undone editing step.
How to cut objects

Introduction
The "Cut command" copies a selected object into the clipboard of the operating system. The
object itself is removed from the picture.
Multiple selection
It is possible to cut several selected objects simultaneously.
Requirements
Procedure
Use the shortcut <CTRL+X> to remove the selected object from the picture and copy it to
the clipboard.
Alternatively you can click the icon
popup menu or on the "Edit" menu.
on the Standard toolbar or use the "Cut" entry on the
Note:
You can easily correct operating steps unintentionally carried out:
Click the button
on the Standard toolbar to undo the last action. You can undo the last 30
editing steps by repeatedly clicking this button.
Use the button
on the Standard toolbar to restore the last undone editing step.
How to copy objects

Introduction
The "Copy command" copies a selected object into the clipboard of the operating system.
The advantage of copying to the clipboard is that object can be inserted several times, and
into different pictures.
Multiple selection
It is possible to copy several selected objects simultaneously.
Note:
When inserting a copied object, an object name is automatically assigned. The name of the
original object is used as object name and linked with a continuous number. No special
characters are used in the object name. You change the object name using the Object Name
attribute.
Requirements
Procedure
Use the shortcut <CTRL+C> to copy the selected object to the clipboard.
Alternatively you can click the icon

on the Standard toolbar or use the "Copy" entry on
the popup menu or on the "Edit" menu.
How to duplicate objects

Introduction
Use the "Duplicate" command to make a copy of the selected objects directly in the active
picture. The Object itself is not modified. The selected object is not copied to the operating
system clipboard.
Multiple selection
It is possible to duplicate several selected objects simultaneously.
Requirements
Procedure
Select "Duplicate" on the popup menu or on the "Edit" menu to make a copy of the selected
object directly in the active picture.
Note:
Position X and Position Y of the inserted duplicated are each 20 pixel greater as Position X
and Y of the original object.
The duplicated object receives the object name of the original object but is supplemented by
a continuous number
Basic dynamic operations

Introduction
To create a process picture, the required objects must be inserted from the Graphics Designer object palette into
a picture. These objects are then dynamically linked suitably to a process to use the process
picture to control and monitor processes.

This chapter introduces the basic dynamic operations provided in the Graphics Designer to
make objects dynamic:
Making attributes dynamic
Configuring events
There is an extensive description of this topic in the chapter "Making Process Pictures
Dynamic".
How to configure a dynamic dialog box

Introduction
A dynamic dialog box is used to acheive high Runtime performance when making attributes
dynamic. A C action is automatically generated from the dynamic dialog box. This can
however be extended later. The advantage of higher Runtime performance is then lost.
A dynamic dialog box is created with the "Dynamic Value Ranges" dialog box which is
described breifly here. More detailed information on this topic can be found under
"Dynamics with the Dynamic Dialog Box".
Opening the "Dynamic Value Ranges dialog box"
Open the "Properties" tab in the "Object Properties" window. In the "Dynamics column,
"select the "Dynamic Dialog" Box entry from the popup menu od the attribute to be made
dynamic.
Event name
The "Event Name" field displays the name of the selected trigger event which defines the
update cycle for the value to be calculated.
The trigger event is configured using the "Trigger dialog box". There is a choice of the events
"Tag", "Standard cycle", "Picture cycle" and "Window cycle" which can be configured and
renamed as required.
Click
to open the "Trigger" dialog box.
Expression / Formula
Specify the formula with which the new value of the attribute should be calculated in
Runtime.
Click
to create the formula from the configured tag, Global Script functions and
operators. Click "Check" to check the formula for errors.
Event of the Expression / Formula
This field displays the calculated value or value range. The evaluation of the event depends
on the set data type.
Data Type
Select the data type for the evaluation of the event. The options "Analog", "Bool", "Bit" and
"Direct are available".
Evaluate tag status
Activate this checkbox to view the current values of the tags in the formula.
How to configure a tag connection

Introduction
Attributes can be made dynamic using a tag connection. Connecting an attribute to a process
tag for example enables the change of the measurement value to be displayed graphically.
All tags available in the project can be selected in the "Tags Project: ..." dialog box which is
briefly described here. More detailed information on the topic can be found under "Making
Dynamic using Tag Connection and "under "Tag Management".
Open "Tags Project: ..." dialog box
Open the "Properties" tab in the "Object Properties" window. In the "Dynamics" column,
select the "Tag" entry from the popup menu od the attribute to be made dynamic.
Filter
If there is a large number of configured tags, the search procedure can take some time. For
instance, for 15,000 tags the search procedure takes about a minute.
By specifying a filter, you can narrow the scope of the search and reduce the duration of the
search procedure. You can achieve a significant increase in efficiency if you configure tags
with the aid of a tag prefix.
Data source
A preselection of the displayed tags can be made via the "Data source window".
Tag groups
The selected tag group complete with its sub-folders is displayed in the left-hand area in the
form of a folder tree.
Folders and subfolders can be open or closed by double-clicking them or by clicking the "+"
or "-" icons. The tags available for the selected entry are shown in the tag display.
Tag display
The right-hand area contains all the tags that are available for the entry selected from the tag
group. The tag display is divided into four columns showing the tag name, type and
parameter, and the point in time at which the tag was last changed. Tags can be sorted by
clicking on the respective column heading.
Procedure
Procedure
1
Select the required filter. An asterisk means that no filter is to be used or no filter has
been defined.
Select one or more data sources.
Open the desired tag group in the left-hand window area.
Select the desired tag from the right-hand window area.
Confirm the selection with "OK".

The "Tags - Project: ..." dialog box closes.
The selected tag is assigned to the selected object and you can continue with the
configuration.
You can link the tag connection of objects

Introduction
The "Linking" command is used to reconfigure the tag connection for all selected objects.
The tag connections configured for the selection are listed in a dialog box and can be linked
directly or with the aid of the "Find" and "Replace" functions.
Open "Linking of the Tag Connection" dialog box
Select all the objects whose tag connection contents you want to link.
On the "Edit" menu select "Linking / Tag Connection" or from the popup menu of the
selection.
Linking tags at the places of use
Tag selection
The left area of the "Places of Use" tab shows a list of the tags configured in the object
selection. All objects are assigned to these tags in the form of a folder tree which contains the
dynamics of the respective tag.
Select a tag or object. The detail view shows the current tag connections.
Detail view
The right area of the "Places of Use" tab shows the current tag connections for the selected
tag or object. You can link these tag connections:
Right-click the required tag connection to call the "Linking" command. The "Linking a Tag"
dialog box opens.
Enter the name of the new tag or click the associated button to select a tag.
Linking tags by searching and replacing
Find
The left area of the "Find and Replace" tag shows the names of all tags configured in the
object selection. There are three search options available to select certain tag names:
Click "Select All" if you want to link the texts displayed.
Select a tag name and click

if you want to change the connection only to this tag.
All remaining tag names are hidden.
Enter the tag names or parts of names you want to search for in the search field. You
can also activate the options "Find whole words only" and "Match case". All tags
which so not meet the search criteria are hidden.
Replace
In the right area of the "Find and Replace" tab you can enter the name of the new tag with
which the selected tag names should be replaced. Alternatively you can click the associated
button to select the required tag.
Click "Preview" to view and check the planned replacement.
Click "Replace" to link the selected tag connections as in the preview.
Caution
The "Replace" function replaces only the part of the tag names contents displayed in the
"Find" text field of the area.
Note:
Grouped objects can only be linked if there are no grouped objects in the group itself.
How to configure a direct connection

Introduction
Events can be made dynamic using a direct connection. A direct connection offers the
quickest dynamics in the picture and achieves the highest Runtime performance. However
the direct connection can only be used within a process picture and only one connection can
be created.
A direct connection is created with the "Direct Connection" dialog box which is briefly
described here. More detailed information on this topic can be found under "Dynamics with a
Direct Connection".
Opening the "Direct Connection" dialog box

Open the "Event" tab in the "Object Properties" window. In the "Action" column, select the
"Direct Connection" entry from the popup menu of the event to be made dynamic.
Source
You can select a constant, object property or a tag as the data source:
Constant
Click the associated button or select a picture of the PDL format which provides the constant.
Object property
Select the object and an attribute of the object whose value should be used as the data source.
Tag
Click the associated button and select the required tag. Define whether the update of the tags
should be done permanently (directly) or only when called (indirectly).
Target
You can select "Current window", "Object in Picture" or "Tag" as the target which should
take the value of the data source:
Current window
Select this option if you want to assign the value of the data source to the active picture.
Object in the picture
Select the object and attribute of this object to which you want to assign the value of the data
source.
Tag
Click the associated button and select the required tag which should take the value of the data
source. Define whether the update of the tags should be done permanently (directly) or only
when called (indirectly). If required, you can activate the output of a operator message.
The properties of an object

Introduction
Form, appearance, position and process connection of an object are determined by the
"Object properties". These properties can be changed as required in the Graphics Designer.
The properties of an object are described by the multitude of "Attributes". An object property
can be changed by a new value is assigned to the associated attributes.
The "Object Properties" window on the "Properties" tab contains all the attributes of a
selected object or a multiple selection of objects. The attributes are subdivided into property
groups such as for example "Geometry" or "Colors". The type and number os property
groups depends on the type of object selected. Therefore for example the "Font" property
group is only displayed for those object types with which a text can be displayed.
With a multiple selection it is possible that individual property groups for one specific object
type are summarized to a shared property group. All attributes of the summarized property
groups available in this group are continued under the "Customized" label.
Alternatively to changing the attributes in the "Object Properties" window, objects can also b
adapted by operation with the mouse and keyboard or by using toolbars and palettes.
However this was it is only possible to change certain object properties such as for example
basic geometric sizes, colors and line styles.
The "Object Properties" window

Introduction
In the Graphics Designer the "Object Properties" window represents the central dialog box
for changing object properties.
To create process pictures it is firstly important to adapt the static values of attributes to for
example define the shape, appearance, position or operability of an object. The "Object
Properties" window allows however process pictures to be made dynamic. By linking the
attributes with dynamic dialog boxes, C actions or tags, the properties of an object can be
dynamically adapted to the requirements of the processes to be displayed. An extensive
description of dynamic procedures can be found in the chapter Making "Process Pictures
Dynamic".
The "Object Properties" window can for example have the following appearance for a
rectangle with the object name "Rectangle1":
The "Object Properties" window can be pinned on top of the Graphics Designer. The
position and size of the window can be changed freely.
The "Object Properties" window is subdivided into Elements toolbar, and the "Properties"
and "Event" tabs. More information about these elements is provided in their extensive
description.
Pin "Object Properties" window on top
Activating Pin
By activating the "Pin" button, the "Object Properties" window can be set so that it is always
in the foreground in the Graphics Designer.
Procedure
1
On the toolbar of the "Object Properties", click
The button is activated and displays the icon

.
The "Object Properties" window is pinned on top.
Deactivating Pin
Procedure
1
On the toolbar of the "Object Properties", click
The button is deactivated and displays the icon

.
The "Object Properties" window is hidden as soon as you click outside the window.
The toolbar in the "Object Properties" window

Introduction
You can define the following setting using the elements on the toolbar of the "Object
Properties" window:
The "Object Properties" can be pinned on top in the Graphics Designer.

Object properties can be transferred.
You can select individual objects of the active picture.
The toolbar can for example have the following appearance for a rectangle with the object
name "Rectangle1":
Elements of the toolbar in the "Object Properties" window
Icon
/
Name
Function
"Pin"
deactivated /
activated
Deactivated:
The "Object Properties" window is closed as soon as
you click outside the window.
Activated:
The "Object Properties" window is always in the
foreground. It is possible to edit different objects
without having to reopen the window.
"Pipette"
Copy properties
The properties of a selected object are copied.
"Pipette"
Assign properties
The previously copied properties are transferred to

the selected object without changing the geometric
attributes of the object. With different object types,
only those attributes which both object types possess
are transferred.
"Object type"
Shows the object type of the selected object. With

several objects, here displays whether it is a
"Multiple selection", a "Group" or a "User object".
"Object selection" Shows the name of the selected object.

A different object can be selected in the dropdown
list field. The dropdown list field shows the names of
all objects in the active picture. The font style of the
entries depends on the type of dynamics.
Font styles of the object selection

Different font style particularly highlight dynamic objects and the type of dynamics in the
object selection. The following font styles are used:
normal
No dynamics are configured for the object. The object is not the target of a configured
direct connection.
bold
At least one dynamics was configured for the object. The object is however not the
target of a configured direct connection.
italic
No dynamics are configured for the object. The object is the target of at least one
configured direct connection.
bold and italic

At least one dynamics was configured for the object. The object is the target of at
least one configured direct connection.
The "Properties" tab in the "Object Properties" window

Introduction
In the "Object Properties" window, the "Properties" tab represents the central dialog box to
change static values of a selected object.
The "Properties" tab can for example have the following appearance for a rectangle with the
object name "Rectangle1":
The width of both window areas and the columns in the attribute display can be changed by
moving the vertical separation lines.
Properties folder
The left area shows the selected object with its property groups in the form of a folder tree.
The selected object is displayed as a folder.
With a multiple selection or a user object, this folder only receives the shared property
groups of the contained individual objects. With a selected group the shared property groups
are listed first and then, as a subfolder, the individual objects with their property groups.
It is not possible to change the entries in the property folder. Folders and subfolders can be
open or closed by double-clicking them or by clicking the "+" or "-" icons. The attributes
available for the selected entry are shown in the attribute display.
Attribute display
The right-hand area contains all the attributes that are available for the entry selected from
the property folder. The attribute display is subdivided into 5 columns in which the static
values and the dynamics of the selected objects are displayed.
The displayed values can be changed by double-clicking or calling the popup menu in the
respective column.
Columns of the attribute display
Column Function
Description
Attribute Attribute name
All attributes of the selected property group are displayed which

are available for the selected object.
The name of the attribute cannot be changed. The static value of
the attribute can be changed by double-clicking the name of the
attribute.
Static
Static value of the The current value of the attribute is shown for the selected object.
attribute
Depending on the type of attribute, the value is displayed as a
number, text or a graphic representation.
The static value of the attribute can be changed by doubleclicking the value or name of the attribute. Further information
can be found in chapter "Changing Object Properties".
Dynamic Making the

The type of dynamics is displayed and marked by one of the
attribute dynamic following icons:
White bulb = no dynamics
Green bulb = dynamics with a tag
Red lightning = dynamics via a dynamic dialog box
Green lightning = dynamics with a C action
Yellow lightning = dynamics with a C action not yet translated
The dynamics of the attribute can be changed. Right-clicking
opens a popup menu on which the required dynamics can be set.
Further information can be found in chapter "Making Process
Picture Dynamic".
Current
Update cycle of
the attribute
The setting for the update cycle is displayed if dynamics of the

attribute are set.
The update cycle of the attribute can be changed by doubleclicking the value. Further information can be found in chapter
"Changing Object Properties".
Indir.
Indirect attribute An attribute can be directly or indirectly made dynamic:

Directly = The attribute is directly made dynamic with the contents of the tags.
addressing
Indirectly = The attribute is linked to a tag of the type "String" which links to
another tag. The attribute is made dynamic with the contents of the referenced
tag.
Indirect addressing of the attribute can be activated by doubleclicking the checkbox if the attribute is made dynamic with a tag.
Further information can be found in chapter "Making Process
Picture Dynamic".
Font styles to display dynamics and events
Dynamics and events are particularly highlighted with the aid of different font styles. The
following font styles are used:
bold
As soon as dynamics or an event are configured to an attribute of the selected object,
the attribute is displayed in bold in the attribute display. The associated property
group in the property folder and the selected object in object selection of the toolbar
are also displayed in bold.
italics
If a direct connection was configured for an event, the target of the direct connection
is displayed in italics in the attribute display. The target object is also displayed in
italics in the object selection of the toolbar.
bold and italics
If a selected object is both target of a direct connection and is dynamic itself, the
attribute in the attribute display and the object in the object selection of the toolbar
are displayed in bold and italics.
The "Events" Tab in the "Object Properties" Window

Introduction
In the "Object Properties" window the "Event" tab represent the central dialog box for
configuring events. Configuring events is described extensively in the chapter "Making
Process Pictures Dynamic".
The "Event" tab in the "Object Properties" window can for example have the following
appearance for a rectangle with the object name "Rectangle1":
The width of both panes and columns in the event display can be changed by moving the
vertical separation lines.
Event folder
The left area shows the selected object in the form of a folder tree. This folder shows entries
such as for example "Mouse", "Keyboard", "Focus" and "Misc" with which events for the
operation of the entire object can be configured. The "Property Topics" displays all property
groups of the selected object. An event can also be configured for each individual attribute of
a property group. If there are several individual objects in the selected object, the structure is
repeated for each individual object.
It is not possible to change the entries in the event folder. Folders and subfolders can be open
or closed by double-clicking them or by clicking the "+" or "-" icons. The configurable
events for the selected entry are shown in the event display.
Event display
The right-hand area contains all the events that are available for the entry selected from the
event folder. The event display is subdivided into 2 columns in which the events and the
linked actions are displayed.
The displayed actions can be changed by double-clicking or calling the pop-up menu in the
"Action" column.
Columns of the event display
Column Function Description

Run at
Event
type
All events are displayed which are available for the selected object and
assigned to the entry selected in the event directory.
The name of the event cannot be changed. The configured action can be
changed by double-clicking the name of the attribute.

Action
Action The action is displayed which is run when event occurs. The selected
selection action is identified by one of the following symbols:
White flash = No action exists for this event.
Blue lightning = There is an action via a direct connection for the event.
Green lightning = There is a C action for the event.
Yellow lightning = There is a C action not yet translated for the event.
The configured action can be changed by double-clicking in the "Run" at
column or by calling the pop-up menu in the "Action" column. Further
information can be found in chapter "Making Process Picture Dynamic".
Triggering events
Events
Run at
Description
Mouse
Mouseclick Is triggered if the cursor is on the object when the mouse button is
pressed and released.
Mouse
Left / right Is triggered when pressing the mouse button directly on the
clicking
object.
Mouse
Left/right
releasing
Is triggered when releasing the mouse button for the object the
cursor was over when the mouse button was pressed.
Keyboard
Pressing
Is triggered when pressing a key on the keyboard. The keys

<F10> and <ALT+PRINT> may not be used for process
operation.
Keyboard
Releasing
Is triggered when releasing a key on the keyboard. The keys

<F10> and <ALT+PRINT> may not be used for process
operation.
Focus
Focus
change
Occurs during focus reception, caused by C action, VBS action or

selection of an object using <TAB> (TAB sequence) or mouse
click.
Miscellaneous Object
change
Occurs if at least one object attribute changes.
Object
attributes
Most object attributes have the Change event. It is used to be able

to react specifically to the change of a certain attribute. The event
occurs if the attribute value changes. The action linked to this
event is logged on individually. With Close Picture, all actions
Change
logged on at this point are logged off individually. This leads to

an increased system load. To keep the system load low, this event
type should be used sparingly and only there where it is
absolutely necessary to react to the change. This is the case for
example when inputting a value in the I/O field.
How to open the "Object Properties" window.

Introduction
The "Object Properties" window on the "Properties" tab contains all the attributes of a selected object or a
multiple selection of objects. The change to an object property is made by assigning a new value
to the relevant attributes.

Requirements
Procedure
Open the "Object Properties" window by doing one of the following:
Click the
icon on the Standard toolbar.
Double-click the selected object.
Select "Properties" on the popup menu.
Select "Properties" on the "View" menu.
Note:
If you want to make changes to several objects, you can lock the view of the "Object
Properties" window using the
icon.
Property groups and attributes

Introduction
On the "Properties" tab of the "Object Properties" window all property groups are displayed
which are available for the selected object. If one of these properties is selected, the
associated attributes for the selected object are listed in the attribute display. The properties
of an object can be changed by assigning a new value to the associated attributes.
This chapter introduces all property groups and the associated attributes. The function of an
attribute is described briefly and is assigned to the object types for which the attribute is
available.
An extensive description of the individual attributes can be found in the "Direct help" which
can be called from the popup menu of the required attribute.
"Geometry" Property Group

Introduction
The "Geometry" property group contains attributes with which you can change the geometric
properties of objects.
Requirements
The "Geometry" property group is available for all objects.
Overview
The following table shows all the attributes of the "Geometry" property group. The function
of an attribute is described briefly and is assigned to the object types for which the attribute is
available.
Attribute
Function
Object Type
Current Value X
Horizontal position of the currently selected corner

point, relative to the picture origin
(Unit: Pixels)
Polygon, polyline,
connector
Current Value Y
Vertical position of the currently selected corner point,

relative to the picture origin
(Unit: Pixels)
Polygon, polyline,
connector
Alpha
Depth angle Alpha for the 3D effect

(Unit: Degree)
3D Bar
Start Angle
Start angle for the display of segment or curved objects

(Unit: Degree)
Ellipse arc, ellipse segment,

circle arc, circle segment
Number of
Number of corners
Polygon, polyline
Corners
Number of Boxes Number of available selection fields
Checkbox, option group
Alignment
Direction of movement of the slider control

(Value: horizontal or vertical)
Slider
Bar Width
Width of the 3D bar

(Unit: Pixels)
3D Bar
Bar Height
Height of the 3D bar

(Unit: Pixels)
3D Bar
Bar Alignment
Direction of the positive bar axis

(top, bottom, left, right)
Bar, 3D bar
Bar Depth
Depth of the 3D bar

(Unit: Pixels)
3D Bar
Base X
Horizontal distance from the right bar edge to the left

object field edge
3D Bar
Base Y
Vertical distance from the lower bar edge to the upper

object field edge
3D Bar
Beta
Depth angle Beta for the 3D effect

(Unit: Degree)
3D Bar
Width
Distance between the left and right borderline of an

object
(Unit: Pixels)
All objects except

application and picture
windows
Width Button 1-4 Individual width for each of the four buttons (1-4)
(Unit: Pixels)
Display Axis
Coordinate axis on which the measurement values are

displayed as 3D bars
Group Display
3D Bar
Corner Radius X Radius of the corner rounding
Rounded Rectangle
Corner Radius Y Radius of the corner rounding
Rounded Rectangle
(Unit: Percentage)
(Unit: Percentage)
End Angle
End angle for the display of segment or curved objects

(Unit: Degree)
Ellipse arc, ellipse segment,

circle arc, circle segment
Window Width
Distance between the left and right borderline

(Unit: Pixels)
Application window,
picture window
Window Height
Distance between the top and bottom border line

(Unit: Pixels)
Application window,
picture window
Same Size
Display type of the four buttons
Group Display
Height
Distance between the top and bottom

borderline of an object
(Unit: Pixels)
All objects except

application and picture
windows
Index
Number of the currently selected corner
Polygon, polyline,
connector
Position X
Horizontal distance of the object origin from

the picture origin
(Unit: Pixels)
All objects
Position Y
Vertical distance of the object origin from the All objects

picture origin
(Unit: Pixels)
Radius
Radius of a circular object

(Unit: Pixels)
Circle, circular arc, circle

segment
Radius X
Horizontal radius of an elliptical object

(Unit: Pixels)
Ellipse, ellipse arc, ellipse

segment
Radius Y
Vertical radius of an elliptical object

(Unit: Pixels)
Ellipse, ellipse arc, ellipse

segment
Rotation
Reference X
Horizontal coordinates of the reference point

about which an object rotates in runtime
Line, Polygon, Polyline,

Static Text
(Unit: Percentage)
Rotation
Reference Y
Vertical coordinates of the reference point

about which an object rotates in runtime

Static Text
(Unit: Percentage)
Rotation Angle
Rotation angle by which the position of an object

deviates from its configured initial position following
rotation around the reference point
(Unit: Degree)

Static Text
Angle Settings
Type of depth display for the 3D effect
3D Bar
The "Colors" property group

Introduction
The "Colors" property group contains attributes with which you can change the color settings
of objects.
Requirements
The "Colors" property group is available for all objects except application windows, picture
windows, Control and OLE object.
Overview
The following table shows all the attributes of the "Colors" property group. The function of
an attribute is described briefly and is assigned to the object types for which the attribute is
available.
Attribute
Function
Object Type
3D Border Color Color of the left and upper part of the 3D

frame
Button, round button
3D Border Color Color of the right and lower part of the 3D

frame
List Background Background color of the non-selected entries

Color
in the selection list
Text List
List Font Color
Font color of the non-selected entries in the

selection list
Text List
Bar Color
Color of the bar to display the current value
Bar
Bar Background
Color
Color of the bar background
Bar
High Limit Color Color of the upper and right arrow key
Slider
Low Limit Color Color of the lower and left arrow key
Slider
Fill Pattern Color Color of the fill pattern
Polygon, ellipse, circle,

ellipse segment, circle
segment, rectangle, round
rectangle, static text,
I/O field, bar, graphic
object, text list,
all Windows object
Background Color Fill color of the object

object, text list, 3D bar,
all Windows object
Button Color
Color of the regulator
Slider
Line Color
Color of the line
All standard objects except

static text,
graphic object, status
display,
all Windows objects
Line Background Background color of the line

Color
All standard objects,

display,
all Windows objects
High Limit
Color of the upper and right slider surface
Background Color
Slider
Border Color
Static text,
I/O field, bar, text list, 3D
bar
Color of the border
Border
Background color of the border
Background Color
I/O field, bar, text list
Font Color
Color of the text in the object
Static text,
I/O field, text list,
button, checkbox, option
box
Selection Font
Color
Color of the font in the selected entry of the

selection list
Text List
Selection
Background color in the selected entry of the Text List
Background Color selection list
Scale Color
Color to display the scale and label
Bar
Trend Color
Color of the trend display which is displays

Bar
the trend of the measurement value in the form
of a small arrow at the lower end of the bar
Dividing Line
Color
Color of the dividing lines in the selection list Text List
Dividing Line
Background color of the dividing lines in the
Background Color selection list
Text List
Low Limit
Color of the lower and left slider surface
Background Color
Slider
"Styles" Property Group

Introduction
The "Styles" property group contains attributes with which you can change the style to
display objects.
Requirements
The "Styles" property group is available for all objects except application windows, picture
windows, Control and OLE object.
Overview
The following table shows all the attributes of the "Styles" property group. The function of
available.
Attribute
Function
3D Border Width Line weight of the 3D border

(Unit: Pixels)
Object Type
Group display
Bar Pattern
Pattern to display the bar surface, for example Bar

solid or broken
Border Weight
Width of the border of a slider control

(Unit: Pixels)
Corners
Representation of the corners of an object, e.g. All standard objects,

round, flat or pointed
Graphic object, status
(belongs to the "Line Style" attribute)
display,
All Windows objects
Latch Down
Saves the last selected switch positioned

("Pressed" or "Not pressed")
Slider
Round Button
Box Alignment
Arrangement of the buttons relative to the

describing text
Fill Pattern
Pattern to display the background surface, for Polygon, Ellipse, Circle,

example solid or broken
Ellipse Segment, Pie
Segment, Rectangle,
Rounded Rectangle, Static
Text
I/O Field, Bar, Graphic
Object, Text List,
All Windows objects
Pressed
Start position of the switch
Round Button
Background
Display of the background
3D Bar
Light Effect
Display of the sides of a 3D bar with different 3D Bar

brightness
Line end
Representation of the line ends of an object,

e.g. round, rectangular or pointed
(belongs to the "Line Style" attribute)

display,
All Windows objects
Line Style
Display type of a line, for example dotted or

display,
All Windows objects
broken
Line End Style
Display type for the end points of a line
Line, polyline, connector
Line Weight
Weight of a line
(Unit: Pixels)

display,
All Windows objects
Border Style
Display type of a border line, for exampledotted I/O field, bar, text list, 3D
or broken
bar
Border Width
Weight of a border line

(Unit: Pixels)
I/O field, bar, text list, 3D

bar
Dividing Line
Style
Display type of the dividing lines of a

selection list, for example dotted or broken
Text List
Dividing Line
Weight of the separation lines in a selection
Text List
Weight
list
(Unit: Pixels)
Windows Style
Adaptation of the object style to the default

settings on the operating system
Button, Slider
The "Font" property group

Introduction
The "Font" property group contains attributes with which you can change the text display of
objects.
Requirements
The "Font" property group is available for the following objects: Static text, I/O field, bar,
text list, group display, button, checkbox and option group.
Overview
The following table shows all the attributes of the "Font" property group. The function of an
attribute is described briefly and is assigned to the object types for which the attribute is
available.
Attribute
Function
Object Type
Bold
Text is displayed in bold
Static text,
I/O field, bar, text list,
group display,
group
Index
Numbering of the individual label fields
Italic
Text is displayed in italics
Static text,
I/O field, text list, group
display,

box
Text Orientation
Horizontal or vertical arrangement of the text Static text,

in the object
box
Text
Object label
Static text, button

checkbox,option group
Underline
Text is underlined
Static text,
display,
box
X Alignment
Horizontal alignment of the text in the object Static text,

display,
box
Y Alignment
Vertical alignment of the text in the object
Static text,
display,
box
Font
Text font
Static text,
group display,
group
Font Size
Font size of the text in points
Static text,
group display,
group
The "Flashing" property group

Introduction
The "Flashing" property group contains attributes with which you can change the flashing of
object elements. The settings of the "Flashing" property group can only be seen in Runtime.
Requirements
The "Flashing" property group is available for all objects except application windows, picture
windows, Control, OLE object and 3D bar.
Overview
The following table shows all the attributes of the "Flashing" property group. The function of
available.
Attribute
Function
Object Type
Flashing
Background
Active
Activates flashing of the background

object, text list,
all Windows object
Flashing Line
Active
Activates flashing of the line
All standard objects, bar,

display,
all Windows objects
Flashing Border
Active
Activates flashing of the border
I/O field, Text List
Flashing Text
Active
Activates flashing of the font
Static text,
box
Flash Frequency Frequency for the flashing of the group display Group Display
Background Flash Frequency for the flashing of the background Polygon, ellipse, circle,
Frequency
object, text list,
all Windows object
Line Flash
Frequency
Frequency for the flashing of the line

display,
all Windows objects
Border Flash
Frequency
Frequency for the flashing of the border
Text Flash
Frequency
Frequency for the flashing of the font
Static text,
box
Flashing
Color for the flash state "Off"
Background Color
Off

object, text list,
all Windows object
Flashing
Color for the flash state "On"
Background Color
On

object, text list,
all Windows object
Flashing Line
Color Off

display,
all Windows objects
Flashing Line
Color On

display,
all Windows objects
Flashing Border
Color Off
Flashing Border
Color On
Flashing Text
Color Off
Static text,

box
Flashing Text
Color On
Static text,
box
The "Miscellaneous" property group

Introduction
The "Miscellaneous" property group contains attributes with which you can change different
object properties.
Requirements
The "Miscellaneous" property group is available for all objects.
The availability of the attributes depends on the type of selected objects. Only those
attributes are displayed which the selected object possess.
Overview
The following table shows all the attributes of the "Miscellaneous" property group. The
function of an attribute is described briefly and is assigned to the object types for which the
attribute is available.
Attribute
Function
Object Type
Update Cycle
Type and frequency of the update
Picture Window, Picture

Object
Display
Activates the display of an object
All objects
Display Options
Specifies if a button is assigned to a graphic,

text, or both
Button
Operator-Control Release to operate an object

Enable
Operator Input
Message
All objects
except:
Application Window
Picture Window
Defines whether a message is output following I/O field

operation
Text List
Checkbox
Option box
Slider
Operator Actions Defines whether the reason for an operation
Report
should be logged
I/O field
Text List
Slider
Operation Steps
Defines how many steps the slider is moved

on the slider surface when the mouse is
clicked
Slider
User Value 1-4
Any 32-Bit value which for example can be

used for a script evaluation
Group Display
Authorization
User-specific authorization to operate an

object
All objects
except:
Application Window
Picture Window
Control
Adapt Picture
Permits adaptation of the picture size to the

window size
Picture Window
Picture Name
Defines the name of the picture to be shown
Picture Window
Picture Offset X
Horizontal coordinate to define a picture

section
Picture Window
Picture Offset Y
Vertical coordinate to define a picture section Picture Window
Picture Status Off Defines the picture displayed when a button is Button
not pressed
Picture Status On Defines the picture displayed when a button is Button
pressed
Bit Pattern Group System-internal Output Value
Display
Group Display
Cursor Mode
Specifies if a process picture is operated in

Runtime using the alpha cursor or the tab
cursor.
Picture object
Cursor Control
Defines whether the Alpha cursor

automatically jumps to the next field of the
I/O field
Text List
TAB order following input in a field

Date of last
change
Indicates the date when the process picture

was last saved.
Picture object
Immediate Input Defines whether when jumping to the object it I/O field
should change directly to input mode
Text List
Extended
Operation
Defines whether the slider jumps to the

Slider
minimum or maximum value when the mouse
is clicked on the slider surface
Extended
zooming
The view of the process picture in Runtime

may be zoomed in or out using the mouse
wheel.
Change Color
Defines whether the color changes segment- Bar

by-segment or for the entire bar when the limit
value is reached
Adapt Size
Permits adaptation of the window size to the

picture size
Picture Window
Sizable
Permits the operator to change the window

size
Application Window
Picture Window
Hotkeys
Defines a key or key combination as an

alternative operation to a mouse action
Button
Hysteresis
Permits display with hysteresis
Bar
Picture object
Hysteresis Range Defines the hysteresis in percentage of the

display range
Bar
Maximum Value Absolute value to display the largest value
Bar
3D Bar
Slider
Can Be
Maximized
Permits the enlargement of a window to the

maximum screen size
Application Window
Picture Window
Minimum Value
Absolute value to display the smallest value
Bar
3D Bar
Slider
Average Value
Permits the an average value over the last 15

values
Bar
Zero Point Value Absolute value to display the zero point
Bar
3D Bar
Process Driver
Connection
Bar
3D Bar
Slider
Default values for the display in Runtime if

the associated tag is not linked or updated
Acknowledgment During display of the group display object, the Group Display
Sample
events "Tolerance Low", "Tolerance High" and
Operator Request are automatically identified
as being acknowledged.
Border
Display of a window with or without a border Application Window

Picture Window
Adapt Border
Dynamic adaptation of the field border to the Static Text

text size
I/O field
Text List
Button
Checkbox
Option box
Scroll Bars
Permits a scroll bar in the window
Picture Window
Scroll Bar
Position X
Horizontal move of picture scroll bar in

picture window with scroll bar
Picture Window
Scroll Bar
Position Y
Vertical move of picture scroll bar in picture

window with scroll bar
Picture Window
Group Relevant
Defines the consideration to form a group

display
Group Display
Collect Value
Collect value of the current state of the active Group Display

message classes
Can Be Closed
Permits a window to be closed
Application Window
Picture Window
ServerName
Display under which name an embedded

object is registered in the operating system
Control
OLE object
Server Prefix
Name of the server from which the picture to Picture Window
be shown is called
Scaling Factor
Zoom factor to display the picture in the

window
Picture Window
Configured
Languages
Displays the languages configured for the

selected object
Static Text
Button
Checkbox
Option box
Text Reference
Defines whether the language-dependent

assignment texts are managed in the text
library or directly in the object
Text list
Title
Activates the titlebar of a window
Application Window
Picture Window
Tool Tip Text
Describing text which appears in Runtime as

soon as the cursor is positioned on the object
All objects
except:
Application Window
Picture Window
Control
Trend
Permits the display of the trend of a

measurement value
Bar
Caption
Headline displayed in the titlebar of the picture Picture Window

window
Tag Prefix
Name extension prefixed on all tag in the

picture
Picture Window
Movable
Permits a window to be moved
Application Window
Picture Window
Foreground
Defines whether a window is pinned on top
Application Window
Picture Window
The "Filling" property group

Introduction
The "Filling" property group contains attributes with which you can control dynamic filling of
objects.
Requirements
The "Filling" property group is available for the following objects: Polygon, ellipse, circle,
ellipse segment, circular segment, rectangle, round rectangle, static text, graphic object,
button, checkbox, option group, round button and slider.
Overview
The following table shows all the attributes of the "Filling" property group. The function of
available.
Attribute
Function
Object Type
Dynamic Filling
Permits dynamic filling of objects with closed All the objects mentioned
border line
above
Fill Level
Height of the object filling with closed border All the objects mentioned
line as a percentage of the object height
above
The "Picture" property group

Introduction
The "Picture" property group contains attributes with which you can change the properties of
the picture to be displayed.
Requirements
The "Picture" property group is only available for the object "Graphic Object".
Overview
The following table shows all attributes of the "Picture" property group and brief description
of their function.
Attribute
Function
Picture
Picture displayed in the Graphic Object
Picture Referenced
Defines whether the picture itself or only a reference to the
picture is incorporated
Picture Transparent Color
Defines which color of the picture is set to "transparent"
Picture Transparent Color

On
Permits the "Transparent Color function"
The "Pictures" property group

Introduction
The "Picture" property group contains attributes with which you can change the properties of
the pictures to be displayed for different states.
Requirements
The "Picture" property group is only available for the object "Round Button".
Overview
The following table shows all attributes of the "Picture" property group and brief description
of their function.
Attribute
Function
Picture Off Referenced
For the "Off" state, defines whether the picture itself or only a
reference to the picture are incorporated
Picture Off Transparent

Color
For the "Off" state, defines which color of the picture is set to
"Transparent"
Picture Off Transparent

Color On
Permits the "Transparent Color" function for the "Off" state
Picture Deact. Referenced For the "Deactivated" state, defines whether the picture itself or
only a reference to the picture are incorporated
Picture Deact. Transparent For the "Deactivated" state, defines which color of the picture is
Color
set to "Transparent"
Picture Deact. Transparent Permits the "Transparent Color" function for the "Deactivated"
Color On
state
Picture On Referenced
For the "On" state, defines whether the picture itself or only a
reference to the picture are incorporated
Picture On Transparent
Color
For the "On" state, defines which color of the picture is set to
"Transparent"
Picture On Transparent
Color On
Permits the "Transparent Color" function for the "On" state
Picture Status Off
Picture displayed for the "Off" state
Picture Status Deactivated Picture displayed for the "Deactivated" state

Picture Status On
Picture displayed for the "On" state
The "Status" property group

Introduction
The "Status" property group contains attributes with which you can change the properties of
the status display.
Requirements
The "Status" property group is only available for the object "Status Display".
Overview
The following table shows all attributes of the "Status" property group and brief description
of their function.
Attribute
Function
Current Status
Status set to display a basic picture or a flash picture
Flash Picture
Picture to be displayed as a flash picture
Flash Picture Referenced

Flash Picture Transparent

Color
Defines which color of the flash picture is set to "transparent"
Flash Picture Transparent

Color On
Permits the "Transparent Color" function for the flash picture
Flashing Flash Picture

Active
Activates flashing of the flash picture
Flash Picture Flash

Frequency
Frequency for the flashing of the flash picture
Basic Picture
Picture to be displayed as basic picture
Basic Picture Referenced

Basic Picture Transparent

Color
Defines which color of the basic picture is set to "Transparent"
Basic Picture Transparent

Color On
Permits the "Transparent Color" function for the basic picture
The "Axis" property group

Introduction
The "Axis" property group contains attributes with which you can change the properties of
the bar.
Requirements
The "Axis" property group is only available for the object "Bar".
Overview
The following table contains all attributes of the "Axis" property group and brief description
of their function.
Attribute
Function
Axis Section
Distance between the main tick marks

(Value difference between two neighboring axis labels)
Alignment
Arrangement of the scale relative to the bar

(above / below or left / right)
Bar Scaling
Type of scale separation
(for example linear or logarithmic)

Label Each
Number of labelled main tick marks

(all, every second, every third, ...)
Exponent display
Permits number representation with exponents
Large Tick Marks
Style for the display of the main tick marks of a scale

(bold or normal)
Large Tick Marks Length
Length of the main tick marks of a scale. The length of the trend tick
marks is 50% of the value set here
(Unit: Pixel)
Decimal Places
Number digits to the right of decimal places to display numerical

values on the scale
Zero Point
Position of the zero point relative to the distance of the scale end
values
(Unit: Percent)
Only Large Tick Marks
Defines whether only the main tick marks or only the trend tick
marks are displayed on the scale.
Scale
Permits the display of a scale to display the values
Scale Marks
Number of bar segments subdivided by the main tick marks of the

scale
Digits to the Left of the

Decimal Point
Number digits to the left of decimal places to display numerical

values on the scale
The "Limits" property group

Introduction
The "Limits" property group contains attributes with which you can set limit values and the
monitoring of limit values.
Requirements
The "Limits" property group is only available for the following objects: I/O field, bar and 3D
bar.
Overview
The following table shows all the attributes of the "Limits" property group. The function of
available.
Attribute
Function
Object Type
Type
Type of display for the specified limit value
(AH, WH, TH, RH4, RH5, (percentage or absolute)
AL, WL, TL, RL4, RL5)
Bar
Bar color (0 - 10)
3D Bar
Color the 3D bar takes when the specified

limit is reached
Bar color
Color the bar takes when the specified limit is Bar
(AH, WH, TH, RH4, RH5, reached
Limit (0 10)
Value of the specified limit
3D Bar
Limit Marker
Permits the display of the limit values on the

scale
Bar
High Limit Value
Upper limit to display a value in the I/O field I/O Field
Upper limit
Value of the specified upper limit
(AH, WH, TH, RH4, RH5)
Lower
limit value
Bar
Lower limit to display a value in the I/O field I/O Field
Lower limit
(AL, WL, TL, RL4, RL5)
Value of the specified lower limit
Bar
Monitor (0 10)
Activates monitoring of the specified limit
3D Bar
Monitor
Activates monitoring of the specified limit
(AH, WH, TH, RH4, RH5,
"The "Output / Input property group

Introduction
Bar
The "Output / Input" property group contains attributes with which you can set the properties
of input and output values.
Requirements
The "Output / Input" property group is only avaiable for the following objects: I/O field, text
list, checkbox, option group.
Overview
The following table shows all the attributes of the "Output / Input" property group. The
function of an attribute is described briefly and is assigned to the object types for which the
attribute is available.
Attribute
Function
Object Type
Number of visible Lines
Defines how many lines the selection list

should contain
Text List
Output Format
Format details to display the output value
I/O Field
Output Value
Default values for the display in Runtime if

the associated tag is not linked or updated
Bit Number
Number of the relevant bit in the output value Text List
Data Format
Data types of the field contents

(binary, decimal, string, hexadecimal)
I/O Field
Field Type
Defines the function type of the field
List Type
Type of text list
Text List
(binary, decimal, bit)
Clear on Invalid Input
Defines whether the field content is

automatically deleted if input is incorrect
I/O Field
Clear on New Input
Defines whether the existing field contents are I/O Field

deleted when the input field is activated
Selected Boxes
Informs the system about which fields are

active
Checkbox
Selected Box
Informs the system about which field is

activated
Option box
Apply on Exit
Defines whether the specified data are applied I/O field, Text List
on exiting the field.
Transfer with Complete

Input
Defines whether the field is automatically

I/O Field
exited and the data applied simultaneously as
soon as the predefined number of characters
have been entered
Hidden Input
Defines whether the input is visible

immediately or replaced by "*"
Assignments
Assignment between the output value and the Text List

output value to be actually output
I/O Field
The "Message Types property group"

Introduction
The "Message Types" property group contains attributes with which you can set the display
of messages depending on message type and message class.
Requirements
The "Message Types" property group is only available for the object "Group Display".
Overview
The following table contains all attributes of the "Message Types" property group and brief
description of their function.
Attribute
Function
Display Text
Label of buttons depending on the displayed message type
Permits flashing background when a message goes out

Went Out Unacknowledged unacknowledged
- Background Flashing
Background color for the flash state Off
Went Out Unacknowledged
- Background Color Off
Background color for the flash state On

- Background Color On
Permits flashing font when a message goes out unacknowledged
- Text Flashing
Color of the text for the flash state Off
- Text Color Off
Color of the text for the flash state On
- Text Color On
Permits flashing background when a message comes in
Came in - Background
Flashing
Came In - Background
Color Off
Came In - Background
Color On
Permits flashing font when a message comes in
Came In - Text Flashing
Came In - Text Color Off
Came In - Text Color On
Came In Acknowledged Background Flashing
Permits flashing background when a message comes in

acknowledged

Came In Acknowledged Background Color Off
Came In Acknowledged -
Background Color On
Permits flashing font when a message comes in acknowledged
Came In Acknowledged Text Flashing
Came In Acknowledged Text Color Off
Came In Acknowledged Text Color On
Message Type
Defines the message type (for example AL, AH, WL, etc.) for
which the attributes of the "Message Types" property group are
configured
The "Assignment" Property Group

Introduction
The "Assignment" property group contains attributes you use to assign message types to
buttons of the group display object. The display of message types is configured in the "Message Types"
property group.
Requirements
The "Assignment" property group is only available for the "Group Display" object.
Overview
The following table shows all attributes of the "Assignment" property group and a brief
description of their function.
Attribute
Function
Message Types for Button 1
Specifies one or several message events for the first

button of the group display object.
Specifies one or several message events for the second

Specifies one or several message events for the third

Specifies one or several message events for the fourth

Specifies one or several message events for the fifth

Specifies one or several message events for the sixth

Specifies one or several message events for the seventh

Specifies one or several message events for the eighth

Special Runtime settings

Introduction
To display and operate individual objects in Runtime, there are different attributes available
whose change is only visible in Runtime:
Display of windows
Operation and logging
These settings are described extensively below.
How to configure the display of windows

Introduction
The "Application Window" and "Picture Window" objects are displayed in Runtime as a
window in a process picture. The properties of this window display can be changed as
required with the attributes described here. Some of these attributes are available for other
object types.
Adapt Size
The "Adapt Picture" attribute specifies whether or not a picture window adapts to the size of
the embedded picture in runtime.
Sizeable
The "Sizeable" attribute specifies whether or not the size of a window can be changed in
runtime.
Border
The "Border" attribute specifies whether or not a window is displayed with a border.
Scroll Bars
The "Scroll Bar" attribute specifies whether or not a picture window is displayed with a scroll
bar if required. A scrollbar is only visible in Runtime.
Can Be Closed
The "Can Be Closed" attribute specifies whether or not a window can be closed in runtime.
Title
The "Title" attribute specifies whether a window is displayed in runtime with or without a
title bar.
Caption
The "Caption" attribute specifies which text appears in the title of a picture window.
Movable
The "Movable" attribute specifies whether or not a window can be moved in runtime.
Foreground
The "Foreground" attribute specifies whether or not a window lies in the foreground. This
setting is independent of the layer to which the window is assigned.
How to Configure Logging and Operator Authorizations

Introduction
In WinCC to operate a process picture you can define user-specific authorization for the
contained objects. Operation may be logged and sent to the message system. The associated
settings can be changed with the attributes described here.
Display
The "Display" attribute specifies whether or not an object is displayed in runtime.
Operator-Control Enable
The "Operator-Control Enable" attribute specifies whether or not an object can be operated in
runtime.
Operator Input Message
The "Operator Input Message" attribute specifies whether or not a message is displayed after
an operation. If the attribute "Operator Input Message" has been set to "yes", a message is
generated upon operation, sent to the message system and archived. Using the message
system, a message may be output in a message line, for example.
Operator Actions Report
The "Operator Activities Report" attribute specifies whether or not the reason for an
operation is to be logged by the operator. The operator activities report is archived in the
message system.
Authorization
The User Administrator editor is used in WinCC to assign authorizations for the users. An
authorization can be assigned for every object in the Graphics Designer. The object can only
be operated by those users with the corresponding authorization.
Note:
An object can only receive an operator authorization as a "Whole". A customized object can
have an operator authorization but its subordinate objects cannot.
Cursor Control
The "Cursor Control" attribute specifies whether the alpha cursor automatically jumps to the
next field in the TAB sequence after an entry has been made in a field. This function enables
rapid input in different fields without having to use the <TAB> key to jump.
Hotkeys
As an alternative to operation with the mouse, a button can also be triggered using the
keyboard. To do so, a hotkey must be set.
Working with objects in the Object Palette

Introduction
"Objects" in the Graphics Designer are the predefined graphic elements that enable efficient
creation of process pictures. All objects can be easily inserted into a picture from the object
palette. The "Default" register tab of the Object Palette provides the objects in the following
object groups:
Standard Objects
Smart Objects
Windows Objects
Line
Polygon
Polyline
Ellipse
Circle
Ellipse Segment
Pie Segment
Ellipse Arc
Circular Arc
Rectangle
Rounded Rectangle
Static Text
Connector
Application Window
Picture Window
Control
OLE Element
Both
Bar
Graphic Object
Status Display
Text List
3D-Bar
Group Display
Button
Check Box
Option Group
Round Button
Slider
Working with standard objects

Introduction
The standard objects include geometric shapes and static text. The geometric shapes draw the
individual elements of the process picture. For example, static text can be used for labels.
Overview
Icon
Object
Description
Line
The line is an open object. The length and angle of a line are
determined by the height and width of the rectangle around the
object. The line ends can for example be shown as arrows or
points.
Polygon
The polygon is a closed object that can be filled with a color or

pattern. A polygon can have any number of corners. The corners
are numbered in the sequence of their creation and can be
modified individually or deleted.
Polyline
The polyline is an open object. Even if the start and finish point
have the same coordinates, that area cannot be filled. A polyline
can have any number of corners. The corners are numbered in the
sequence of their creation and can be modified individually or
deleted. The line ends of a polyline can for example be shown as
arrows or points.
Ellipse
The ellipse is a closed object that can be filled with a color or

pattern. The height and width of an ellipse can be modified as
desired to allow it to be aligned horizontally or vertically.
Circle
A circle is a closed object that can be filled with a color or

pattern. A circle can be resized at will.
Ellipse
Segment
The ellipse segment is a closed object that can be filled with a

color or pattern. The height and width of an ellipse segment can
be modified as desired to allow it to be aligned horizontally or
vertically.
Pie Segment The pie segment is a closed object that can be filled with a color
or pattern. A pie segment can be resized at will.
Ellipse Arc
The ellipse arc is an open object. The height and width of an

ellipse arc can be modified as desired to allow it to be aligned
horizontally or vertically.
Circular Arc The circular arc is an open object. A circular arc can be resized at
will.
Rectangle
The rectangle is a closed object that can be filled with a color or

pattern. The height and width of a rectangle can be modified as
desired to allow it to be aligned horizontally or vertically.
Rounded
Rectangle
The rounded rectangle is a closed object that can be filled with a

color or pattern. The height and width of a rounded rectangle can
be modified as desired to allow it to be aligned horizontally or
vertically. The corners of a rounded rectangle can rounded as
much as desired.
Static Text
The field for static text is a closed object that can be filled with a
color or pattern. The static text is entered into a field of any
desired size. One-line or multiline text can be input for all
designed languages.
Connector
The connector is a linear object whose ends can be connected with the
connection points of other objects. The number and arrangement of the
connection points depend on the specific object type. If connected objects are
moved, the connector's length and direction is automatically adapted and the
connection is retained.
How to draw a line

Introduction
The line is an open object. The length and angle of a line are determined by the height and
width of the rectangle around the object. The line ends can for example be shown as arrows
or points.
Drawing a line
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert a line.
In the Object Palette, click on the standard object "Line".
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert a line.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the line to the required length.
When you release the mouse button, the line is finished.
Alternatively you can double click on the line in the Object Palette. A line with default object
properties is then inserted near the picture origin.
Changing a line
Select an object of the line type if you wish to carry out one of the following changes:
Actions with the mouse
Drag the rectangle surrounding the object to a new position in order to arrange the object in
the picture.
Drag the handles on the rectangle surrounding the object to a new position in order to resize
the object.
Palettes and toolbars
Use the elements of the standard toolbar to mirror or rotate the object.
Use the Color Palette to change the line color.
Use elements of the Style Palette to change the display style for the object.
Attributes
Open the "Object Properties" window to change the current values of the desired attributes.
Configuring the Line Style
Line Style
The "Line Style" attribute defines the style in which a line appears. This enables, for
example, to display a line dotted or dashed.
A line with a line weight of 1 pixel can be displayed in two colors. I this case, a broken line
style must be selected and another color for the line selected in the background. If the
"Colors" property group defines the line color with the line background color identical, the
breaks in the line are not visible.
Five line styles are available for selection.

Line ends
The "Line End" attribute defines the appearance of the line end. The definition applies to
both ends of the line. Select one of the three following options:
A rounded end sets the middle point of the circle at the end point of the line. The
diameter of the circle adapts to the line weight.
A rectangular end sets the middle point of a square at the end point of the line. The
width and the height of the square adapts to the line weight.
A flat line end ends the line at the end points.
Configuring line ends
The "Line Ends" attribute specifies in which style the ends of a line object appear. The ends
of a line object can have different shapes. For example, a line can begin with a dot and end
with an arrow.
Configuring rotation in runtime

The line can rotate around a reference point in runtime. The rotation is defined by the
attributes "Rotation Reference X", "Rotation Reference Y" and "Rotation Angle".
How to draw a polygon

Introduction
The polygon is a closed object that can be filled with a color or pattern. A polygon can have
any number of corners. The corners are numbered in the sequence of their creation and can
be individually modified or deleted.
How to draw a polyline

Introduction
The polyline is an open object. Even if the start and finish point have the same coordinates,
the area cannot be filled. A polyline can have any number of corners. The corners are
numbered in their sequence of creation and can be modified individually or deleted. The line
ends of a polyline can for example be shown as arrows or points.
Drawing a polyline
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert a polyline.
In the Object Palette, click on the standard object "Polyline".
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert a polyline.
Click on the selected starting point with the left mouse button.
Click on every other desired corner of the polyline with the left mouse button.
Click once with the right mouse button to correct the last drawn section of the polyline.
Finish the polyline by double-clicking the left mouse button.
Alternatively you can double click on the polyline in the Object Palette. A polyline with
default object properties is then inserted near the picture origin.
Changing a polyline
Select an object of the polyline type if you wish to carry out one of the following changes:
Rectangle surrounding the object
the picture.
the object.
Attributes
Changing corners
The positions of the corners can be changed with the attributes "Current Value X" and
"Current Value Y" in the "Object Properties" window. The position number of the current
selected corner is shown by the "Index" attribute in the "Geometry" property group.
Changing the value specified here enables targeted selection of a corner. A change of the
"Index" attribute for the current selected corner also changes the displayed value of the
attributes "Current Value X" and "Current Value Y".
You can also change corners by actions with the mouse:
Moving corners
Position the mouse pointer on the corner that is to be moved and drag it to the desired
position with the mouse button held down.
Inserting corners
Hold down the <ALT> key and insert another corner by double-clicking on a corner. The
additional corner is inserted between the clicked corner and the previously created corner.
Deleting corners
Position the mouse pointer of the corner that you want to delete. Hold down the <CTRL> key
and delete the corner by double-clicking on the left mouse button.
Configuring the Line Style
Line Style
The "Line Style" attribute defines the style in which a line appears. This enables, for
example, to display a line dotted or dashed.
A line with a line weight of 1 pixel can be displayed in two colors. I this case, a broken line
style must be selected and another color for the line selected in the background. If the
"Colors" property group defines the line color with the line background color identical, the
breaks in the line are not visible.
Five line styles are available for selection.
Line ends
The "Line End" attribute defines the appearance of the line end. The definition applies to
both ends of the line. Select one of the three following options:
A rounded end sets the middle point of the circle at the end point of the line. The
diameter of the circle adapts to the line weight.
A rectangular end sets the middle point of a square at the end point of the line. The
width and the height of the square adapts to the line weight.
A flat line end ends the line at the end points.
Corners
The "Corners" attributes defines the appearance of the corners where the lines connect. The
definition applies for all corners of an object. Select one of the three following options:
A rounded corner sets the middle point of a circle at the intersection of two line ends.
The diameter of the circle adapts to the line weight.
The two outer corner points of the connected lines are linked by a straight line. This
results in a beveled appearance of the corners.
A pointed corner corresponds to the real corner intersection of the connecting lines.
Configuring line ends
The "Line Ends" attribute specifies the style of the ends of a line object. The ends of a line
object can have different shapes. For example, a line can begin with a dot and end with an
arrow.

The line can rotate around a reference point in runtime. The rotation is defined by the
attributes "Rotation Reference X", "Rotation Reference Y" and "Rotation Angle".
How to draw an ellipse

Introduction
The ellipse is a closed object that can be filled with a color or pattern. The height and width
of an ellipse can be modified as desired to allow it to be aligned horizontally or vertically.
Drawing an ellipse
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert an ellipse.
In the Object Palette, click on the standard object "Ellipse".
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert an ellipse.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the ellipse to the required size.
When you release the mouse button, the ellipse is finished.
Alternatively you can double-click on the ellipse in the Object Palette. An ellipse with default
object properties is then inserted near the picture origin.
If you hold down the <SHIFT> key when drawing the ellipse, the "Ellipse" object is created
in the shape of a circle.
Changing an ellipse
Select an object of the Ellipse type if you wish to carry out one of the following changes:
the picture.
the object.

Use the Color Palette to change the background color.
Attributes
Drawing a circle
Introduction
A circle is a closed object that can be filled with a color or pattern. A circle can be resized at
will.
Drawing a circle
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert a circle.
In the Object Palette, click on the standard object "Circle".
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert a circle.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the circle to the required size.
When you release the mouse button, the circle is finished.
Alternatively you can double click on the circle in the Object Palette. A circle with default
object properties is then inserted near the picture origin.
Circle
- change
Select an object of the circle type if you wish to carry out one of the following changes:
the picture.
the object.
Attributes
How to draw an ellipse arc

Introduction
The ellipse arc is an open object. The height and width of an ellipse arc can be modified as
desired to allow it to be aligned horizontally or vertically. An ellipse arc is by default a
quarter ellipse and can be configured after it has been created.
Drawing an ellipse arc
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert an ellipse arc.
In the Object Palette, click on the standard object "Ellipse Arc".
Place the mouse pointer on the position in the picture at which the center point of the
ellipse arch will be.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the ellipse arc to the required size.
The insertion process is finished as soon as you release the mouse button.
The start and end point of the ellipse arc are shown by small gray squares. Place the
mouse pointer on one of these squares.
The mouse pointer changes to a cross with a superimposed A (start angle) or E (end angle).
Drag the start or end point to the desired position while holding down the mouse button.
Alternatively you can double click on the ellipse arc in the Object Palette. An ellipse arc with
If you hold down the <SHIFT> key while drawing, the "Ellipse Arc" object is created in the
shape of a circular arc.
Changing an ellipse arc
Select an object of the Ellipse Arc type if you wish to carry out one of the following changes:
the picture.
the object.
Attributes
Setting the length of the ellipse arc
The length of the ellipse arc is set by the "Start Angle" and "End Angle" attributes. They
specify the angle in degrees by which the start and end angle of the object deviate from the
zero position (0).
The start and end point of the ellipse arc are shown by small gray squares. Place the mouse
pointer on one of these squares. The mouse pointer changes to a cross with a superimposed A
(start angle) or E (end angle).Drag the start or end point to the desired position while holding
down the mouse button.
Note:
Even if the values of the start and end angle are identical, an ellipse arc does not turn into a
closed ellipse.
How to draw a circular arc

Introduction
The circular arc is an open object. A circular arc can be resized at will. A circular arc is by
default a quarter circle and can be configured after it has been created.
Drawing circular arc
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert a circular arc.
In the Object Palette, click on the standard object "Circular Arc".
circular arc will be.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the circular arc to the required size.
The start and end point of the circular arc are shown by small gray squares. Place the
Alternatively you can double click on the circular arc in the Object Palette. A circular arc
with default object properties is then inserted near the picture origin.
Changing circular arc
Select an object of the Circular Arc type if you wish to carry out one of the following changes:
the picture.
the object.
Attributes
Configuring length of the circular arc
The length of the circular arc is set by the "Start Angle" and "End Angle" attributes. They
zero position (0).
The start and end point of the circular arc are shown by small gray squares. Place the mouse
pointer on one of these squares. The mouse pointer changes to a cross with a superimposed A
(start angle) or E (end angle).Drag the start or end point to the desired position while holding
down the mouse button.
Note:
Even if the values of the start and end angle are identical, a circular arc does not turn into a
closed circle.
How to draw an ellipse segment

Introduction
The ellipse segment is a closed object that can be filled with a color or pattern. The height
and width of an ellipse segment can be modified as desired to allow it to be aligned
horizontally or vertically. An ellipse segment is by default a quarter ellipse and can be
configured after it has been created.
Drawing ellipse segment
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert a ellipse segment.
In the Object Palette, click on the standard object "Ellipse Segment".
ellipse segment will be.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the ellipse segment to the required size.
The start and end point of the ellipse segment are shown by small gray squares. Place the
Alternatively you can double click on the ellipse segment in the Object Palette. An ellipse
segment with default object properties is then inserted near the picture origin.
If you hold down the <SHIFT> key while drawing, the "Ellipse Segment" object is created in
the shape of a pie segment.
Changing an ellipse segment
Select an object of the ellipse segment type if you wish to carry out one of the following
changes:
the picture.
the object.
Attributes
Configuring size of the ellipse segment
The length of the ellipse segment is set by the "Start Angle" and "End Angle" attributes. They
zero position (0).
The start and end point of the ellipse segment are shown by small gray squares. Place the
mouse pointer on one of these squares. The mouse pointer changes to a cross with a
superimposed A (start angle) or E (end angle).Drag the start or end point to the desired
position while holding down the mouse button.
Note:
Even if the values of the start and end angle are identical, an ellipse segment does not turn
into a closed ellipse.
How to draw a pie segment

Introduction
The pie segment is a closed object that can be filled with a color or pattern. A pie segment
can be resized at will. A pie segment is by default a quarter circle and can be configured after
it has been created.
Drawing a pie segment
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert a pie segment.
In the Object Palette, click on the standard object "Pie Segment".
Place the mouse pointer on the position in the picture at which the center point of the pie
segment will be.
4
Hold down the mouse button and drag the pie segment to the required size.
The start and end point of the pie segment are shown by small gray squares. Place the
Alternatively you can double click on the pie segment in the Object Palette. A pie segment
with default object properties is then inserted near the picture origin.
Changing Pie Segment
Select an object of the pie segment type if you wish to carry out one of the following changes:
the picture.
the object.
Attributes
Configuring size of the pie segment
The size of the pie segment is set by the "Start Angle" and "End Angle" attributes. They specify
the angle in degrees by which the start and end angle of the object deviate from the zero position (0).
The start and end point of the pie segment are shown by small gray squares. Place the mouse
pointer on one of these squares. The mouse pointer changes to a cross with a superimposed A (start angle)
or E (end angle).Drag the start or end point to the desired position while holding down the
mouse button.
Note:
Even if the values of the start and end angle are identical, a pie segment does not turn into a
closed circle.
How to draw a rectangle

Introduction
The rectangle is a closed object that can be filled with a color or pattern. The height and
width of a rectangle can be modified as desired to allow it to be aligned horizontally or
vertically.
Drawing a rectangle
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert a rectangle.
In the Object Palette, click on the standard object "Rectangle".
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert a rectangle.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the rectangle to the required size.
When you release the mouse button, the rectangle is finished.
Alternatively you can double click on the rectangle in the Object Palette. A rectangle with
If you hold down the <SHIFT> key while drawing, the "Rectangle" object is created in the
shape of a square.
Changing rectangle
Select an object of the Rectangle type if you wish to carry out one of the following changes:
the picture.
the object.

Attributes
How to draw a rounded rectangle

Introduction
The rounded rectangle is a closed object that can be filled with a color or pattern. The height
and width of a rounded rectangle can be modified as desired to allow it to be aligned
horizontally or vertically. The corners of a rounded rectangle can be rounded as much as
desired.
Drawing a rounded rectangle
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert a rounded rectangle.
In the Object Palette, click on the standard object "Rounded Rectangle".
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert a rounded
rectangle.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the rounded rectangle to the required size.
When you release the mouse button, the rounded rectangle is finished.
Alternatively you can double click on the rounded rectangle in the Object Palette. A rounded
rectangle with default object properties is then inserted near the picture origin
If you hold down the <SHIFT> key while drawing, the "Rounded Rectangle" object is
created in the shape of a square.
Changing Rounded Rectangle
Select an object of the Rounded Rectangle type if you wish to carry out one of the following
changes:
the picture.
the object.
Attributes
Changing corner radii
The radii for rounding the corners of the rounded rectangle are specified with the "corner
radius X" and "corner radius Y" attributes. They define the horizontal or vertical distance
between the corners of the rectangle around the object and the starting point of the corner
rounding. The value is specified as a percentage of the half width and the half height of the
object.
Note:
If the "Corner Radius X" and "Corner Radius Y" attributes are both set to the value 100%,
the rounded rectangle is displayed as an ellipse or circle. As soon as one of the two attributes
has the value 0%, a normal rectangle without rounded corners is displayed.
How to Insert Static Text

Introduction
The field for static text is a closed object that can be filled with a color or pattern. The static
text is entered into a field of any size. One-line or multiline text can be input for all design
languages.
Inserting static text
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert static text.
In the Object Palette, click on the standard object "Static Text".
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert static text.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the text field to the required size.
The field for the static text is complete as soon as you release the mouse button.
A number of highlighted question marks are shown in the field.
Overwrite the question marks with the desired text.

For multiline texts create a line wrap with the key combination <SHIFT+ENTER> or
<CTRL+M>.
Press <ENTER> to finish text input.
Alternatively you can double-click on static text in the Object Palette. A static text with
default object properties is then inserted near the picture origin
If you hold down the <SHIFT> key while drawing, the "Static Text" object is created in the
shape of a square.
Changing static text
Select an object of the Static Text type if you wish to carry out one of the following changes:

the picture.
the object.
Use elements of the default toolbar to mirror and rotate the object or to change the font.
Attributes
Changing the contents of the static text
Double-click on the static text to open the input mode for text. The complete text is selected.
Position the insertion point with another click at the position in the text at which you want to
change something.
Line breaks must be entered manually: Create a line break either with the key combination
<SHIFT+ENTER> or key combination <CTRL+M>.
A line break is displayed in the "Object Properties" window in the "Static" column as a
control character.
The static text can be rotated around a reference point in runtime. The rotation is defined by
the attributes "Rotation Reference X", "Rotation Reference Y" and "Rotation Angle". The
rotation is displayed in Graphics Designer during configuration.
In order to rotate static text in a group object, watch for the following:
The current position are always the result of the current values of properties
"RotationReferenceX", "RotationReferenceY" and "Rotation Angle". The orientation of static
text depends on the sequence in which these properties were applied.
If the rotation references refer to the group object, the display in Runtime may deviate from
the display in the configuration system. This is caused by the fact that the sequence in which
these properties are updated is not always the same due to system constraints. You avoid
unexpected display problems in Runtime, if you do not dynamisize the properties
RotationReferenceX, RotationReferenceY and RotationAngle directly at the group object.
Instead, perform the dynamization directly at the respective object "Static Text" within the
group object.
How to use the connector

Introduction
The connector is a linear object whose ends can be connected with the connection points of
other objects. Multiple connectors can also be connected together.
The number and arrangement of the connection points depend on the specific object type. If
connected objects are moved, the connector's length and direction are automatically adapted
and the connection is retained.
Select one of two connection types available. In the case of "Automatic" connection type, the
connector is comprised of horizontal and vertical parts.
If the connection type "Simple" is selected, the connecting points are connected by a straight
line.
The start and end of a selected connector can be highlighted by small colored rectangles to
show their status:
Green rectangles identify unconnected ends

Red rectangles identify connected ends
Inserting connectors
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert a connector.
In the Object Palette, click on the standard object "Connector".
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert a
connector.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the connector to the required size.
The connector as a selected object is shown with green ends.
Alternatively you can double click on the connector in the Object Palette. A connector with
Changing a connector
Select an object of the connector type if you wish to carry out one of the following changes:
Attributes
Connecting objects
Procedure
1
Select the connector with which you want to connect two objects.
The beginning and end of the connector are symbolized by small green rectangles.
2
Drag the start of the connector to the first object that you want to connect without
releasing the mouse button.
The red connection points at the start of the object to be connected are shown.
Position the start of the connector on the desired connection point on the object.
The connection to the first object is established as soon as you release the mouse button.
The start of the selected connector is shown as red and the other unconnected end is
green.
Drag the end of the connector to the second object that you want to connect without
releasing the mouse button.
The red connection points at the end of the object to be connected are shown.
Position the end of the connector on the desired connection point on the second object.
When you release the mouse button, the connection is finished. The beginning and end of
the selected connector are now symbolized by red rectangles.
The positions of the connected objects can be changed as desired.
Changing connection
Select the connector and drag one end of the connector to the new position. For example, you
can connect the end to another connection point of the same object, or to a connection point
on a new object.
Alternatively you can change the attributes of the "Connected Objects" properties group in
the "Object Properties" window.
The type of connector can be changed within the "Connected objects" properties group using
the "Connection type" attribute. Select between the two connection types "Automatic" and
"Simple".
Releasing connection
Select the desired connector and press <DEL> to delete the "Connector" object.
Working with smart objects

Introduction
Smart objects offer the option of building complex system pictures. The smart objects
include items such as various windows, fields and bars, which offer a variety of dynamic
options.
Overview
Icon
Object
Description
Application The application window is an object that can be supplied from

Window
applications of the global script and the logging system. In
runtime, these applications open an application window, transfer
information and enable operation. The size and properties which
an application window accepts in Runtime are defined in the
Graphics Designer.
Picture
Window
The picture window offers the option of displaying other pictures

that were created with the Graphics Designer in the current
picture. For example, the contents of a picture window can be
continuously updated with dynamics. The size and properties that
a picture window has in runtime are defined in the Graphics
Designer.
Control
The Object Control provides the option to integrate system
process control and monitoring elements into a picture. Controls

are prefinished objects such as for example alarm windows,
measuring windows, selection dialog boxes or buttons. ActiveX
Controls, WinCC Controls and controls from other manufacturers
are available if they are registered in the operating system. These
are changed as required and dynamically integrated into the
process. The size and properties which a control accepts in
Runtime are defined in the Graphics Designer.
OLE Object The OLE element enables files created in other programs to be
inserted into a picture. Therefore all OLE elements registered in
the operating system can be integrated. The size and properties
which an OLE element accepts in Runtime are defined in the
Graphics Designer. No changes can be made to OLE elements in
Runtime.
I/O Field
The I/O Field can be defined as an input field, an output field or a

combined input/output field. The following data formats are
available: binary, decimal, string and hexadecimal. Limit values
such as "Hidden Input" or "Accept on complete input" can also be
specified. The size and properties which an I/O Field accepts in
Bar
The bar offers the option of displaying values graphically. The

values can also be displayed in a combined view as graphics with
freely definable number scale. The size and properties which a
bar accepts in Runtime are defined in the Graphics Designer.
Graphic
Object
The graphic object enables graphics created in other programs to

be inserted into a picture. Graphics and pictures can be inserted in
the following formats: EMF, WMF, DIB and BMP. The size and
properties of a graphic object in runtime are defined in the
Graphics Designer.
Status
Display
The status display offers the option to display almost any number
of different states of an object. The states are implemented via
tags whose value corresponds to the respective state. The states
are displayed via the assigned pictures. The size and properties
which a status display accepts in Runtime are defined in the
Graphics Designer.
Text List
The text list offers the option of assigning specific values to a

text. The text list can be defined as an input list, an output list or
as a combined input/output list. The following data formats are
available: decimal, binary or bit. The size and properties which a
text list has in Runtime are defined in the Graphics Designer.
3D Bar
The 3D bar graph enables values to be displayed graphically

three-dimensionally. The size and properties which a 3D bar has
in Runtime are defined in the Graphics Designer.
The 3D bar is only available if the "Basic Process Control"
optional package was installed with WinCC.
Group
Display
The group display enables the current states of certain message

types to be displayed hierarchically. Four buttons allow messages
to be represented and operated. Using a group display, it is
possible for example to implement a quick change to represent an
error source. The size and properties which a group display
accepts in Runtime are defined in the Graphics Designer.
The group display is only available if the "Basic Process Control"
optional package was installed with WinCC.
How to Insert an Application Window

Introduction
The application window is an object that can be provided from applications of the global
script and the logging system. In runtime, these applications open an application window,
transfer information and enable operation. The size and properties which an application
window accepts in Runtime are defined in the Graphics Designer.
Inserting application window
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert an application window.
In the Object Palette, click on the smart object "Application Window".
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert an
application window.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the application window to the required size.
The "Window Contents" dialog opens.
In the "Window Contents" dialog select the desired display option and confirm your input
with "OK".
The "Template" dialog opens.
In the "Template" dialog select a template for the selected display option and confirm
your input with "OK".
The insertion process for the "Application Window" object is finished.
Alternatively you can double-click the smart object "Application Window" in the object
palette. An application window with the default object properties is then inserted near the
picture origin.The "Window Contents" and "Template" dialogs open. The insertion process is
finished when you conform your inputs with "OK".
If you press and hold <SHIFT> during resize, the "Application Window" object becomes
square in shape.
Window display in runtime
The application window is displayed in runtime as a separate window within a process
picture. The characteristics of the window display can be configured with attributes of the
"Miscellaneous" properties group.
How to insert a picture window

Introduction
The picture window offers the option of displaying other pictures that were created with the
Graphics Designer in the current picture. For example, with dynamics the contents of a
picture window can be continuously updated. The size and properties that a picture window
has in runtime are defined in the Graphics Designer.
Inserting a picture window
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert a picture window.
In the Object Palette, click on the smart object "Picture Window".
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert a picture
window.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the picture window to the required size.
Alternatively you can double click on the picture window in the Object Palette. A picture
window with default object properties is then inserted near the picture origin.
If you hold down the <SHIFT> key during insertion, the "Picture Window" object is created
in the shape of a square.
Changing a picture window
Actions with the mouse
the picture.
the object.
Attributes
Specify picture zoom area
Double-click on the "Picture name" attribute and select a picture of the PDL format that you
want to display in the picture window.
Use the "Scaling Factor" attribute to specify the zoom factor for displaying the picture in the
picture window.
A process picture that is embedded in a picture window can only be displayed as a zoom
area. The origin of this zoom area is determined by the "Picture Offset X" and "Picture Offset
Y" attributes.
How to insert a control

Introduction
The "Control" object offers the option of integrating system process control and monitoring
elements into a picture. Controls are prefinished objects such as for example alarm windows,
measuring windows, selection dialog boxes or buttons. ActiveX Controls, WinCC Controls
and controls from other manufacturers are available if they are registered in the operating
system. These are changed as required and dynamically integrated into the process. The size
and properties which a control accepts in Runtime are defined in the Graphics Designer.
For the detailed description of the controls and their configuration dialogs see "Working with
Controls".
Requirements

The use of configuration dialogs must be enabled in the "Options" tab of the "Tools /
Settings..." menu.
Procedure
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert a control.
In the Object Palette, click on the smart object "Control".
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert a control.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the control to the required size.
The "Insert a Control" dialog opens.
See "Working with Controls" for the description of this dialog.
Select one of the controls registered in the operating system and confirm your input with
"OK".
The associated configuration dialog now opens for some controls.
For the detailed description of the controls and their configuration dialogs see "Working
with Controls".
Make the settings in the configuration dialog as required and confirm your input with
"OK".
The insertion process for the "Control" object is finished.
Alternatively you can select the desired control directly in the "Control" tab of the Object
Palette. Step 5 of the procedure described above is unnecessary in this case.
If you hold down the <SHIFT> key during insertion, the "Control" object is created in the
shape of a square.
How to insert a graphic object

Introduction
The graphic object enables graphics created in other programs to be inserted into a picture.
Graphics and pictures in the following formats can be inserted: BMP, DIB, ICO, CUR, EMF,
WMF, GIF and JPG.
The size and properties which a graphic object accepts in Runtime are defined in the
Graphics Designer.
Requirements

Settings..." menu.
Inserting Graphic Object
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert a graphic object.
In the Object Palette, click on the smart object "Graphic Object".
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert a graphic
object.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the graphic object to the required size.
The "Graphic Object Configuration" dialog opens.
Select the picture that you want to display in the graphic object.
The description of the configuration dialog can be found in the next section.
Click on "OK" to confirm your input.

The insertion process for the "Graphic Object" is finished.
Alternatively you can double-click the smart object "Graphic Object" in the object palette. A
graphic object with default object properties is then inserted near the picture origin.The
"Graphic Object Configuration" dialog opens. The insertion process is finished when you
confirm your inputs with "OK".
If you hold down the <SHIFT> key during insertion, the "Graphic Object" object is created in
the shape of a square.
Configuring a graphic object
The "Graphic Object Configuration" dialog opens after the insertion process if the use of
configuration dialogs is enabled in the "Options" tab of the "Tools / Settings..." menu. It
enables fast configuration of the important features of the graphic object.
The configuration dialog can also be opened with the object's pop-up menu. Specific
attributes can be changed in the "Object Properties" window.
Preview
The picture selected in the picture selection is displayed as a preview.
Selection of Picture
The picture selection shows all pictures in the BMP, DIB, EMF and WMF formats that are in
the graphics directory "GraCS" of the current WinCC project.
Select the picture that you want to display in the graphic object. Click on the "Browse ..."
button to insert additional pictures from the picture selection.
See the "Select Pictures" section for the detailed description.
Changing Graphic Object
Select an object of the graphic object type if you wish to carry out one of the following
changes:
the picture.
the object.
Use the "Rotate" element of the standard toolbar to rotate the object.
Attributes
Note:
If the "Picture Transparent Color On" attribute has the value "Yes" for a graphic object, the
available flash frequency is also reduced if necessary.
How to Insert a Group Display

Introduction
The group display enables the current states of certain message types to be displayed by
hierarchy. Up to eight buttons permit display and operation of messages. Using a group
display, it is possible for example to implement a quick change to represent an error source.
The size and properties which a group display accepts in Runtime are defined in the Graphics
Designer.
The group display is only available if the "Basic Process Control" optional package was
installed with WinCC.
Inserting Group Display
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert a group display.
In the Object Palette, click on the smart object "Group Display".
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert a group
display.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the group display to the required size.
Alternatively you can double-click the smart object "Group Display" in the object palette. A
group display with default object properties is then inserted near the picture origin.
If you hold down the SHIFTkey during insertion, the "Group Display" object is created in the
shape of a square.
Changing Group Display
Select an object of the group display type if you wish to carry out one of the following
changes:
the picture.
the object.
Attributes
Default Settings of Group Display
If you insert a picture into the group display, the group display will have five buttons. 11
message types and their respective colors and texts are assigned to those five buttons. You
may change the assignment and may configure three additional buttons. The default settings
of graphics objects are changed by using the property dialog (right mouse button) of the
default object selected in the object palette.
Connect Group Display with a PCS 7 Measuring Point

To configure the link to the tag, use the Dynamic Wizard "Link Group Display with PCS 7
Measuring Point". Start the wizard and define the required settings. The group display
"Group value" attribute is linked to the "EventState" structure tag of the PCS 7 measuring
point concerned.
The individual bits of this tag are interpreted in PCS 7 as follows:
Status information of PCS 7 tag "EventState":
Bit in double word
Message class
Message type
Bit 31 (MS-bit)
Alarm
AH
Bit 30
Alarm
AL
Bit 29
Warning
WH
Bit 28
Warning
WL
Bit 27
Tolerance
TH
Bit 26
Tolerance
TL
Bit 25
AS Process controlling
messages
Fault
Bit 24
messages
Fault
Bit 23
Maintenance request
Maintenance request
Bit 22
Process message
PM
Bit 21
not assigned
not assigned
Bit 20
Operator request
OR
Bit 19
OM
Bit 18
Status Message
Status AS
Bit 17
Status Message
Status OS
Bit 16
Measuring point locked
Acknowledgment information of PCS 7 tag "EventState":
Bit in double word
Message class
Message type
Bit 15
Alarm
AH acknowledged
Bit 14
Alarm
AL acknowledged
Bit 13
Warning
WH acknowledged
Bit 12
Warning
WL acknowledged
Bit 11
Tolerance does not require acknowledgment for PCS 7
Bit 10
Tolerance does not require acknowledgment for PCS 7
Bit 9
messages
Fault acknowledged
Bit 8
messages
Fault acknowledged
Bit 7
Maintenance request
MR acknowledged
Bit 6
Process message
PM acknowledged
Bit 5
not assigned
not assigned
Bit 4
Operator request
acknowledgment not
required for PCS 7
Bit 3
Operator request
acknowledgment not
required for PCS 7
Bit 2
Status message
acknowledgment not
required for PCS 7

Bit 1
Status message
acknowledgment not
required for PCS 7
Bit 0 (LS-bit)
Measuring point block

acknowledgment not
required for PCS 7
You may assign any of the 16 message types to any bit and thereby change the default
settings. Configuration is performed in the "Message Type" property in property group
"Message Types".
Connecting a Group Display with a Self-Defined Tag
Independent of PCS 7, you may connect a group display with a tag. In this tag you will
assign individual bits on a need basis.
Procedure
1
Open the group display Pop-up menu and select "Properties".
Select "Miscellaneous" in the "Properties" tab control.
Open the pop-up menu in the "Group Value" line, "Dynamic" column and select "Tag...".
The tag must be a 32-bit tag with sign.
Select a tag from the process level or from the internal tags in the "Tag selection"
window.
Activate the "Upon Change" update cycle in the "Current" column.
If an internal tag is used, it should have the start value 65535 (0x0000FFFF). This ensures
that, from the point of view of the group display, there are no unacknowledged messages
resent when started.
For individually configured group displays, the supplied acknowledgment sample of "3088"
is most likely not suitable for your project and must be adjusted.
Influencing Acknowledgment Behavior by Using the "EventQuit" Tag.
Configuring Message Types
The "Message Types" property group contains attributes with which you can set the display
of messages depending on the 16 message types.16 For example, each message type may be
visualized by an appropriate label and by color changes of the button.
Assigning Message Types to Buttons
In the "Assignment" object property of the group display you assign message types to the
buttons. Enter the respective bit numbers in the group value.
The buttons may have multiple assignments
with bit numbers corresponding to message classes. These are separated by "/".
with bit numbers corresponding to message types. These are separated by ",".
The sequence of entries determines their priority. The earliest entry is displayed with the
highest priority in case of concurrent events.
Lock Display
The "Lock" property group contains attributes with which you can change the view of locked
measuring points. The "Lock Display" attribute specifies for a group display, whether or not a
locked measuring point should be displayed. The lock applies to all buttons of the group
display, independent of which other events in the hierarchy are pending.
In the default settings for the group display, the fifth button is reserved for display of status
"Measuring point locked" by using "Group Value Bit 16". This allows to display not only
pending events in the hierarchy but also those locked in subordinate measuring points.
How to insert an OLE element

Introduction
The OLE element enables files created in other programs to be inserted into a picture.
Therefore all OLE elements registered in the operating system can be integrated. The size
and properties which an OLE element accepts in Runtime are defined in the Graphics
Designer. No changes can be made to OLE elements in Runtime.
Requirements

The desired file type must be registered in the operating system.
Inserting an OLE object
Procedure
1
Open the picture into which you want to insert an OLE object and click on the smart
object "OLE object" in the Object Palette.
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert an OLE
object.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the OLE object to the required size.
The "Insert an object" dialog opens.
Select the option "Create from file" or "Create new".

Both options are described in detail in the "OLE object" chapter.
Create from file

The "Create from file" option selects an existing file for display in the selected OLE object.
The selected file is edited in the OLE object with the program that is registered for editing
the selected file type in the operating system.
Create new
The "Create new" option selects a file type for a new file that is created in the selected OLE
object. The selected file is edited in the OLE object with the program that is registered for
editing the selected file type in the operating system.
Note:
To prevent problems in runtime, a video object of the AVI format is inserted as a control
object and not as an OLE object.
Changing OLE object
Select an object of the OLE object type if you wish to carry out one of the following changes:
the picture.
the object.
Attributes
Editing embedded file in the OLE object
Procedure
1
Double-click on the OLE object to edit the embedded file in the OLE object.
The program that is registered in the operating system for editing the embedded file type
opens in the Graphics Designer.
2
Make the desired changes.

See the help system of the program for information on the editing procedures.
Finish editing the embedded file by deselecting the OLE object.
Note:
An OLE object that you want to edit in a picture must be in the original path. If this is not the
case, double-clicking on the OLE object may affect the operation of the Graphics Designer.
After processing an OLE object, it can occur that the toolbars of the Graphics Designer are
no longer displayed. You can prevent this error after processing an OLE object if you first
close the server application (for example Excel or Paint) before exiting from the Graphics
Designer.
To restore the display of toolbars, proceed as follows:
1. Select all of the objects available in the active picture.
2. Open the "View" menu and select the entry "Toolbars...".
3. In the "Toolbars" dialog, click on the "Restore" button.
How to insert an OLE object with the "Create from file" option
Introduction
The "Create from file" option selects an existing file for display in the selected OLE object.
The selected file is edited in the OLE object with the program that is registered for editing
the selected file type in the operating system.
Requirements

Procedure
Procedure
1
object.
Select the option "Create from file".

The "Insert Object" dialog shows an input field, the "Browse..." button and the "Link"
control box.
Enter the directory path and the name of the desired file into the input field. Or click the
"Browse..." button to select the desired file with the "Browse" dialog.
Activate the "Link" control box if you do not want to copy the selected file into the OLE
object but only to link to it as a reference.
Activate the "As Symbol" control box if you only want to display a symbol for the
embedded file type and not the contents of the selected file.

The insertion process for the OLE object is finished.
How to insert an OLE object with the "Create new" option

Introduction
The "Create new" option selects a file type for a new file that is created in the selected OLE
object in the "Insert object" dialog. The selected file is edited in the OLE object with the
program that is registered for editing the selected file type in the operating system.
Requirements

Procedure
Procedure
1
object.
3
Select the "Create new" option.

A list is shown in the "Insert an object" dialog that contains all file types registered in the
operating system.
Select the object type for the file that you want to create in the selected OLE object.
Activate the "As Symbol" control box if you only want to display a symbol for the
embedded file type and not the contents of the selected file.

The insertion process for the OLE object is finished.
Double-click on the OLE object to edit the embedded file in the OLE object.
The program that is registered in the operating system for editing the embedded file type
opens in the Graphics Designer.
Finish editing the embedded file by deselecting the OLE object.

The changes are accepted.
How to insert an I/O Field

Introduction
The I/O Field can be defined as an input field, an output field or a combined input/output
field. The following data formats are available: binary, decimal, string and hexadecimal.
Limit values such as "Hidden Input" or "Accept on complete input" can also be specified.
The size and properties which an I/O Field accepts in Runtime are defined in the Graphics
Designer.
Requirements
Settings..." menu.
Inserting an I/O Field
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert an I/O Field.
In the Object Palette, click on the smart object "I/O Field".
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert an I/O
Field.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the I/O Field to the required size.
The "I/O Field Configuration" opens.
Enter the desired values into the fields of the configuration dialog.
6

The insertion process for the "I/O Field" object is finished.
Alternatively you can double-click the smart object "I/O Field" in the object palette. An I/O
Field with default object properties is then inserted near the picture origin.The "I/O Field
Configuration" dialog opens. The insertion process is finished when you confirm your inputs
with "OK".
If you hold down the <SHIFT> key during insertion, the "I/O Field" object is created in the
shape of a square.
Changing I/O Field
Select an object of the I/O Field type if you wish to carry out one of the following changes:
the picture.
the object.
Attributes
How to configure an I/O Field

Introduction
The "I/O-Field Configuration" dialog opens after the insertion process if the use of
enables fast configuration of the important features of the I/O Field.
Tag
The I/O Field can be set dynamically by embedding tags. Regardless of the selected field
type, the value of these tags can be displayed as output or changed by entering data.
Enter the name of the desired variable or click on the
symbol to open the "Tags Project: ..." dialog to select a tag. See the "Select Tag" section for the detailed description.
Update
The frequency of display update can be configured for the value displayed as output.
Enter the desired interval or select an interval from the dropdown list. See the "Update cycle"
section for the detailed description.
Field Type
field.
Specify the desired field type.
Font
The font for displaying input and output values can be changed regardless of the selected
field type.
Click one of the three possible buttons to open the associated dialogs.
How to change limit values and type of value input

Introduction
A value range can be defined for input and output of an I/O Field using limit values. Values
outside this value range cannot be displayed or input. Additional settings that offer protection
against accepting incorrect values can be made for value input.
Specifying field type
field.
Specify the desired field type with the "Field type" attribute in the "Output / Input" property
group.
Specifying limit values
The "High Limit Value" attribute defines the maximum limit value for input and output. The
specified value depends on the "data format" of the I/O field. The "Low Limit Value"
attribute defines the minimum limit value for input and output. The specified value depends
on the "data format" of the I/O field.
If a value is lower than the low limit value or higher than the high limit value, the following
effects may occur in runtime:
Field type = "Input"

The "WinCC Runtime" dialog is opened and displays the error message "The entered
value is outside the configured limits".
Confirm the error message with "OK" and enter another value.
Field type = "Output"

The display of the value is substituted by the character string "***".
The "Data Format" and "Field Type" attributes can be changed in the "Output / Input"
property group. A limit value cannot be specified for the "String" format.
Input value into an I/O Field
Procedure
1
Double-click on the I/O Field.

The input mode opens. A placeholder is displayed for every character corresponding to
the specified data format.

If a value has already been input, it is highlighted.
2
Enter a new value.
Depending on the setting of the attributes of the I/O Field, the value is accepted on
completion of input or the input must be finished by pressing <ENTER>.
Specifying type of value input

Immediate Input
The "Immediate Input" attribute for input fields specifies whether a jump to the object
switches directly to the input mode or not.
Clear on New Input
input The "Clear on New Input" attribute specifies whether the field contents are cleared
when selecting the field.
Clear on Invalid Input
The "Clear on Invalid Input" attribute can be used to prevent adoption of an incorrect input
value when the field is left. For example, an input value that does not correspond to the
predefined data format of the input field is incorrect.
Apply on Complete Input
The "Apply on Full" attribute specifies when an input value is applied. If the attribute has the
value "No", the input value is only applied when the input is confirmed with <ENTER>.
Otherwise the input value is automatically applied as soon as the preset number of characters
has been entered.
Apply on Exit
The "Apply on Exit" attribute can also be enabled for a value input in the event that the I/O
Field is exited without prior confirmation or reaching the required number of characters.
Hidden Input
The "Hidden Input" attribute specifies whether the input value is displayed during input as
normal or encrypted. If this attribute has the value "Yes", every character input is replaced
with the "*" character. The input value and the data format of the input value can not be seen.
How to define the output format for the "Binary" data type
Introduction
Four different data formats are available for the input and output of values in an I/O field.
Numerical values can be edited in binary, decimal or hexadecimal format. The "String" data
format must be specified for the I/O Field to display text.
Based on the specified data format, different output formats can be selected or freely defined
for displaying the field contents.
The definition for an output format can be rewritten as a sequence of formatting codes. The
formatting codes act as placeholders for a specific group of characters. For example, if a
formatting code for which only the display of the numbers 0-9 is preset for a specific position
in the display of an I/O Field, only letters can be input at this position.
Caution
If the value you want to display does not correspond exactly to the definition of the output
format, only three asterisks are displayed. This applies for the length of the entire character
string and also for the type and position of the individual characters.
Formatting codes - "binary" data type
1
Placeholder for the binary values 0 and 1. The number of the formatting code "1"
specifies the permissible number of positions for displaying a binary value.
If necessary a leading zero is placed before the binary value. The output format can
therefore begin with the formatting code "0", but can only have this once.
Example - "binary" data type

The 8-digit binary value 10011101 can be displayed as follows:
Output Format
Allowed number of positions
Display
11
01
011
2 + leading zero
001
1111
1101
01111
4 + leading zero
01101
1111111
0011101
01111111
7 + leading zero
00011101
1111111111
10
10011101
01111111111
10 + leading zero
010011101
How to define the output format for the "Decimal" data type
Introduction
Four different data formats are available for the input and output of values in an I/O field.
Numerical values can be edited in binary, decimal or hexadecimal format. The "String" data
format must be specified for the I/O Field to display text.
Based on the specified data format, different output formats can be selected or freely defined
for displaying the field contents.
The definition for an output format can be rewritten as a sequence of formatting codes. The
formatting codes acts as placeholders for a specific group of characters. For example, if a
formatting code for which only the display of the numbers 0-9 is preset for a specific position
in the display of an I/O Field, only letters can be input at this position.
Caution
If the value you want to display does not correspond exactly to the definition of the output
format, only three asterisks are displayed. This applies for the length of the entire character
string and also for the type and position of the individual characters.
Formatting codes - "decimal" data type
Placeholder for the binary values 0 and 9. The number of the formatting code "9"
specifies the permissible number of positions for displaying a decimal value. If the
actual number of decimal places exceeds the number specified in the display format, the
displayed value is rounded out.
A comma defines the position for decimal point. The formatting code "," can be at any
position in the output format, but can only be used once.
Positive decimal numbers are displayed with signs. The formatting code "s" must be at
the first position of the output format and must be used only once.
Leading and following zeroes are displayed when the actual number of position before
and after the decimal point is less that the number set in the display format. The
formatting code "0" must be before the first "9" and must be used only once.
e
The decimal number is displayed in exponential format. The formatting code "e" must
be at the last position of the output format and must be used only once.
Example - "Decimal" data type

The 6-digit decimal number 123.456 can be displayed as follows:
Output Format
Allowed number of positions
Display
999
124
999,9
123,5
s999.9
4 + sign
+123,5
999,999
123,456
09999,9999
8 + zeroes
0123,4560
s09999.9999
8 + sign + zeroes
+0123,4560
1111111111
10
10011101
9.99999e
1.23456e+002
Note:
If a floating point number is saved in the IEEE format of the S5, an output format that allows
the sign and exponent should be used for display in an I/O Field (e.g. s0999.999e).
How to insert a bar

Introduction
The "Bar" object offers the option of displaying values graphically. The values can also be
displayed in a combined view as graphics with freely definable number scale. The size and
properties which a bar accepts in Runtime are defined in the Graphics Designer.
Requirements

Settings..." menu.
Inserting bar
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert a bar.
In the Object Palette, click on the smart object "Bar".
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert a bar.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the bar to the required size.
The "Bar Configuration" dialog opens.
6

The insertion process for the "Bar" object is finished.
Alternatively you can double-click the smart object "Bar" in the object palette. A bar with
default object properties is then inserted near the picture origin. The "Bar Configuration"
dialog opens. The insertion process is finished when you confirm your inputs with "OK".
If you hold down the <SHIFT> key during insertion, the "Bar" object is created in the shape of
a square.
Changing bar
Select an object of the bar type if you wish to carry out one of the following changes:
the picture.
the object.
Attributes
How to configure a bar

Introduction
The "Bar Configuration" dialog opens after the insertion process if the use of configuration
dialogs is enabled in the "Options" tab of the "Tools / Settings..." menu. It enables fast
configuration of the important features of the bar.
Tag
The display value of the bar can be dynamically changed by embedding a tag.
Update
The frequency of updating the value displayed by the bar can be configured for the value
displayed as output.
Limits
The two ends of the bar view are specified by the maximum value and the minimum value of
the bar.
Enter the desired limits for the bar display. See the "Change maximum value" and "Change
minimum value" for the detailed description.
Bar Alignment
Specify the direction of the coordinate axis to which the maximum value of bar points.
See the "Changing bar direction of the bar" section for the detailed description.
How to configure the limits of a bar

Introduction
For the "3D bar" object, up to 5 limits can be defined, each of which has an upper (High) and
a lower (Low) limit value. The limits are termed:
Name
High limit (High)
Low limit (Low)
Alarm limit A
Warning limit W
Tolerance limit T
Reserve 4 R4
Reserve 5 R5
AH Alarm High
WH Warning High
TH Tolerance High
RH4 Reserve High 4
RH5 Reserve High 5
AL Alarm Low
WL Warning Low
TL Tolerance Low
RL4 Reserve Low 4
RL5 Reserve Low 5
Common: Limit X
XH High Limit Value of limit XL Low Limit Value of limit

X
X
High limit, low limit, type

The "Upper Limit XH" and "Lower Limit XL" attributes specify the limit values for the
corresponding Limit X. The "Type X" attributes specify whether the specified limit values
are displayed as absolute values or as percentage values.
Bar color, Change Color
The "Bar Color XH" and "Bar Color XL" attributes can be used to assign a color to any Limit
X. The display value is shown in the corresponding color as soon as, starting from the zero
point of the bar display, it is higher than the corresponding Upper Limit XH or lower than the
Lower Limit XL. The "Change Color" attribute in the "Miscellaneous" property group
specifies whether this color change is to take place segment-wise or for the entire display.
Monitoring, Limit Marker
The color change can only be displayed for a Limit X if the "Monitoring X" attribute has the
value "Yes". If the "Limit Marker" attribute has the value "Display", the configured and
monitored limits are indicated by marking arrows. These limit markers receive the bar color
of the corresponding limit and are shown on the side of the bar opposite the scale.
Trend
The "Trend" attribute specifies whether or not the trend is displayed.
The trend display enables a fast overview of changes for the bar. If the value displayed in the
scale is exceeded, a small arrow is displayed beside the scale by default. The arrow indicates
that the measured value cannot be displayed on the scale. Another scale can be shown on the
other side of the bar to avoid having to wait for the next update. This arrow shows the trend
of the current movement of the bar.
Hysteresis, Hysteresis Range

So that a color change is not triggered immediately in the case of a slight limit violation, the
"Hysteresis" and "Hysteresis Range" attributes can be used to define a distribution range for
the display of the value.
The "Hysteresis" attribute for the "Bar" object specifies whether the display with hysteresis is
permitted or not.
The "Hysteresis Range" attribute specifies for the "Bar" object the hysteresis as a percentage
of the display range.
How to configure the bar scale

Introduction
The "Bar" object can be labeled by showing a scale. The layout and graduation of the scale
and the size and format of the label can be configured by changing the relevant attributes as
required.
Setting scale end values and zero point value
The "Maximum value" attribute specifies the absolute value for displaying the highest value.
The "Minimum value" attribute specifies the absolute value for displaying the lowest value.
The "Zero Point Value" attribute specifies the absolute value for the zero point of the bar.
Setting layout of the scale
The "Scale" attribute specifies for the "Bar" object whether the bar is labeled with a scale.
The "Bar Direction" attribute specifies for the "Bar" object the direction of the coordinate
axis in which the highest display value of the bar points.
The "Alignment" attribute specifies the layout of the scale relative to the bar. Depending on
the setting for the "Bar Direction" attribute in the "Geometry" property group, the scale can
be displayed to the left or right or above or below the bar.
Defining bar segments

The "Scale Marks" attribute specifies the number of segments into which the bar is divided
by the large tick marks of the scale.
The "Axis Section" attribute defines the distance between the large tick marks. The value is shown
as the difference in value between two adjacent large tick marks.
Setting scale division
The "Zero Point" attribute specifies for the representation of the bar in which position the
zero point value is displayed. The value is specified relative to the spacing of the scale end
values in %. For a value of 0 %, for example, the zero point value is shown at the height of
the large tick mark with the lowest value. The zero point can also be outside of the range
represented.
The "Zero Point" attribute is only evaluated if the "Bar Scaling" attribute has the value
"Automatic". The absolute value for the zero point is set with the "Zero Point Value" attribute in
the "Miscellaneous" property group.
The "Bar Scaling" attribute specifies the type of scale division. A suitable choice of scale
division makes it possible to highlight a certain value range in the bar display.
Setting format of tick marks

The "Only Large Tick Marks" attribute specifies for the "Bar" object whether the sections
between the large tick marks in the scale of the bar are divided by shorter tick marks.
The "Large Tick Marks" attribute specifies whether the large tick marks of the scale are bold
or normal.
The "Length of Large Tick Marks" attribute specifies the length of the large tick marks. The
length of the shorter tick marks corresponds to half of the value specified here. The values are
specified in pixels.
Setting format of label

The "Label Each" attribute specifies the number of labeled large tick marks. If, for example,
the attribute has the value "3", only every third large tick mark is labeled, starting with the
large tick mark with the lowest value.
The "Exponent Display" attribute shows whether the numerical values of the scale are shown
as exponents or as decimal values without exponents.
The "Digits to the Left of the Decimal Point" attribute specifies the number of digits to the
left of the decimal point for the numerical value display in the scale.
The "Decimal Places" attribute specifies the number of digits to the right of the decimal point
for the numerical value display in the scale.
How to insert a status display

Introduction
The status display offers the option to display almost any number of different states of an
object. The states are implemented via tags whose value corresponds to the respective state.
The states are displayed via the assigned pictures. The size and properties which a status
display accepts in Runtime are defined in the Graphics Designer.
Requirements

Settings..." menu.
Inserting a status display
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert a status display.
In the Object Palette, click on the smart object "Status Display".
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert a status
display.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the status display to the required size.
The "Status Display Configuration" dialog opens.

The insertion process for the "Status Display" object is finished.
Alternatively you can double-click the smart object "Status Display" in the object palette. A
line with default object properties is then inserted near the picture origin.The "Status Display
with "OK".
If you hold down the <SHIFT> key during insertion, the "Status Display" object is created in
Changing Status Display
Select an object of the Status Display type if you wish to carry out one of the following
changes:
the picture.
the object.
Attributes
How to configure a status display

Introduction
The "Status Display Configuration" dialog opens after the insertion process if the use of
configuration dialogs is enabled in the "Options" tab of the "Tools / Settings..." menu. The
"Status Display Configuration" dialog enables fast configuration of the important features of
the status display.
Tag
The value of the status you want to display can be set dynamically by embedding a tag.
Update
The frequency of updating the display can be set for the status display.
Enter the desired interval or select an interval from the dropdown list. See the "Change
Update cycle" section for the detailed description.
Status list
The status list shows the linked pictures and the specified flash frequency for all configured
states.
States can be inserted and every setting can be changed with a pop-up menu. Pictures of the
picture selection can be referenced by dragging them with the mouse to the required position
in the state list. See the "Configuring Status" section for the detailed description.
Bit Position
A state can also be assigned to a specific bit position on the tag.
Click on the arrow key to select a bit position. Click the "Add" button to enter a state for this
bit position in the state list. Click on the "Add" button again to insert the next higher bit position.
See the "Configuring Status" section for the detailed description.
Preview
The picture selected in the picture selection is displayed as a preview.
Selection of Picture
The picture selection shows all pictures in the graphics directory "GraCS" of the current
WinCC project. Graphics and pictures of the following formats can be inserted:
BMP, DIB, ICO, CUR, EMF, WMF, GIF and JPG.
Drag a picture in the picture selection to the desired position in the status list with the mouse
to set its status as a basic picture or a flash picture. Click on the "Browse ..." button to insert
additional pictures from the picture selection.
See the "Select Pictures" section for the detailed description.
How to configure states

Introduction
The status display offers the option to display almost any number of different states of an
object. The states are implemented via tags whose value corresponds to the respective state.
In runtime the states are displayed via the assigned pictures. If no picture that you want to
display is defined for a status, the symbol for the status display is shown as a placeholder.
If a status that has not been configured occurs in runtime, the pictures of the prior status are
shown. The settings for the following status are shown if there was no prior status.
States can be configured in the status list of the "Status Display Configuration" dialog. The
configuration dialog is also be opened with the "Status Display" object's pop-up menu. The
status list shows the linked pictures and the specified flash frequency for all configured
states. States can be inserted and every setting can be changed with a pop-up menu. A state
can also be assigned to a certain bit position on the tag.
The status display is divided into four columns, the width of which can be changed by
moving the separation lines. Every line of the status list shows the settings for a specific
state. Clicking on the exact position of a setting opens the pop-up menu. The following
settings can be configured in the status list:
Column State
shows the value of a configured status. States can be inserted or deleted. The
command "Clear List" of the pop-up menu removes all states to which no pictures are
assigned.
Column Basic Picture
Shows the name of the picture that is shown when the status occurs during runtime.
The basic picture of a status can be deleted with the pop-up menu.
Column Flash picture

Shows the name of the picture that is shown alternately with the basic picture if a
flash frequency is set for the flash. The flash picture of a status can be deleted with
the pop-up menu.
Column Flash
Shows the specified flash frequency. The values "no flashing", "Slow", "Medium"
and "Fast" can be set with the pop-up menu.
Inserting status
Select the position in the "State" column at which you wish to insert a status. Select the entry
"Add" in the pop-up menu. The status for the next free position is inserted.
Inserting status as bit position
Click on the arrow key to select a bit position. Click the "Add" button to enter a state for this
bit position in the state list. The value selected as bit position is increased by one position.
Click on the "Add" button again to insert the next higher bit position.
Renaming status
Double-click the position in the state column at which you wish to rename a status. Enter the
new value and confirm your input with <ENTER>. If the new is already assigned, no change
is made.
Deleting status
Select the position in the state column at which you wish to delete a status. Select the entry
"Delete" in the pop-up menu. The status is deleted so long as at least one additional status is
configured.
Clearing status list
Open the pop-up menu at any status in the state column and select the entry "Clear List". All
states to which no pictures are assigned are cleared.
ZAssigned pictures
Select the picture in the picture selection that you want to assign a status as basic picture or
flash picture. Drag the picture to the desired position with the mouse. An existing picture is
replaced by the new picture.
Delete pictures
Select the entry "Delete" in the pop-up menu of a configured picture to remove the picture
from the status list.
Changing flash
If a status is assigned only one basic picture, the associated flash automatically receives the
"no flashing" attribute. If a basic picture and flash picture are assigned to a status, you can
change the flash with the pop-up menu.
How to add a text list

Introduction
The text list offers the option of assigning specific values to a text. The text list can be
defined as an input list, an output list or as a combined input/output list. The following data
formats are available: decimal, binary or bit. The size and properties which a text list has in
Requirements
Settings..." menu.
Inserting Text List
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert a text list.
In the Object Palette, click on the smart object "Text List".
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert a text list.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the text list to the required size.
The "Text List Configuration" dialog opens.

Alternatively you can double-click the smart object "Text List" in the object palette. A text
list with default object properties is then inserted near the picture origin. The "Text List
with "OK".
If you hold down the <SHIFT> key during insertion, the "Text List" object is created in the
shape of a square.
Note:
If you assign a text to a value in the text list, the text must not include a semicolon.
The semicolon is a WinCC control character and will be automatically deleted in a text.
Changing text list
Select an object of the text list type if you wish to carry out one of the following changes:
the picture.
the object.
Attributes
How to configure a text list

Introduction
The "Text List Configuration" dialog opens after the insertion process if the use of
enables fast configuration of the important features of the text list. The configuration dialog
can also be opened with the object's pop-up menu. Specific attributes can be changed in the
"Object Properties" window.
Tag
The text list can made dynamic by embedding a tag. Regardless of the selected field type, the
value of these tags can be displayed as output or changed by entering data.

Update
The frequency of updating the display can be configured for the value displayed as output.
Field Type
The text list can be defined as an input list, an output list or as a combined input/output list.
Specify the desired field type.
Font
The font for displaying input and output values can be changed regardless of the selected
field type.
Click one of the three possible buttons to open the associated dialogs.
How to configure apply values and display text of a text list

Introduction
Output value and apply values can be configured by changing the associated attributes for the
"Text List" object as required. In addition, assignments and reference for the display text can
be configured.
Specifying field type
The fields of the text list can be defined as an input field, output field or combined
input/output field. Specify the desired field type with the "Field type" attribute in the "Output
/ Input" property group.
Change output value
The "Output Value" attribute specifies a start value for the output which is displayed in
runtime in the case of a missing process driver connection or if an update has not yet taken
place.
Activating apply values on exit
The "Apply on Exit" attribute specifies whether the input is applied when you exit the text
list with <TAB> or by clicking the mouse.
Specifying text reference
The "Text Reference" attribute specifies where the language-dependent assignment texts are
stored. The texts can be managed directly in the object or in the text library where the
translation into other languages is made.
Configuring assignments
The "Assignments" attribute in the "Input/Output" properties group allows specification of
display texts. The display texts are displayed depending on the current "Output Value" in the
text list.
Note:
If you assign a text to a value in the text list, the text must not include a semicolon.
The semicolon is a WinCC control character and will be automatically deleted in a text.
How to configure assignments for the "Decimal" list type

Introduction
The text list offers the option of assigning specific values to a text. The "Assignments"
attribute in the "Input/Output" properties group allows display texts to be specified. The
display texts are displayed depending on the current "Output Value" in the text list.
The "Decimal" list type allows specific values or value ranges to display texts.
Requirements
Select a text list of the "Decimal" list type.

Open the "TextList assignments (decimal)" dialog by double-clicking on the
"Assignments" attribute in the "Output/Input" properties group.
Defining new assignments
Procedure
Select a range type from the dropdown list field to specify the desired value range:
"Single Value" - a display text is assigned to one single value.
"From Value" - A display text applies to all values greater than or equal to that specified
here.
"To Value" - A display text applies to all values lesser than or equal to that specified here.
"From To Value" - A display text applies to all values of the value range specified here.
Enter the desired value or value range.
Enter the text that you want to display for this value or value range. The text must not
include a semicolon.
Click on the "Append" button.

The new assignment is input into the assignments list.
Sorting assignments
Select the assignments that you want to sort. Click on the "Up" or "Down" button to move
these assignments to the assignments list.
Deleting assignments
Select the assignments that you want to delete in the assignments list and click on the
"Delete" button.
How to configure assignments for the "Binary" list type
Introduction
Display texts are assigned by bit number for the "Binary" list type. Up to 32 display texts can
be defined. If a bit set in the output value is not assigned a display text, three asterisks appear
in the drop-down list.
Requirements
Selecting a text list of the "Binary" list type.

Open the "TextList assignments (binary)" dialog by double-clicking on the
Defining new assignments
Procedure
1
Enter the bit number that you want to assign to a display text.
Enter the desired display text. The text must not include a semicolon.
Click on the "Append" button.

The new assignment is input into the assignments list.
Sorting assignments
Select the assignments that you want to sort. Click on the "Up" or "Down" button to move
these assignments to the assignments list.
Deleting assignments
Select the assignments that you want to delete in the assignments list and click on the
"Delete" button.
How to configure assignments for the "Bit" list type

Introduction
With the "Bit" list type one display text each can be defined for the states "1 - Bit set" and "0
- Bit not set" of the bit relevant to the output value. The "Bit Number" attribute specifies the
number of the relevant bit in the output value.
Requirements
Selecting a text list of the "Bit" list type.

Open the "TextList assignments (bit)" dialog by double-clicking on the
Defining assignments
Enter the desired display text for the states 0 and 1 and confirm the assignments with "OK".
The display text must not include a semicolon.
Working with Windows objects

Introduction
The Windows objects are elements familiar from Windows applications such as buttons,
check boxes, option groups and sliders. A round button can also be designed. The objects can
be modified and made dynamic in many ways. They enable you to operate process events
and to control processes.
Overview
Icon
Object
Description
Button
The button enables process operation. It is used for example to

acknowledge messages. A button can have two different states:
"On" and "Off". A button is integrated into the process by
providing the corresponding attributes with dynamics.
Checkbox
The checkbox enables the operator to select several options and to

check the corresponding checkboxes. It is also possible to check
checkboxes by default so that the operator only changes the

predefined value as required. A checkbox is integrated into the
process by providing the corresponding attributes with dynamics.
Option box
The option box enables the operator to selected one of the

presented options and to activate the corresponding options field.
It is also possible to activate one of the options fields by default
so that the operator only changes the predefined value as required.
An option box is integrated into the process by providing the
corresponding attributes with dynamics.
Round
Button
The round button enables process operation. It is used for

example to acknowledge messages or to navigate in Runtime. A
round button can have three different states: "On", "Off" and
"Deactivated". It is also possible to define whether a round button
should by default be displayed as pressed and whether it should
click when pressed. A round button is embedded into the process
by making the corresponding attributes dynamic.
Slider
The slider is a slide controller and enables processes to be

controlled. For example, it can be used for infinitely variable
changes to a value. A slider is embedded into the process by
making the corresponding attributes dynamic.
How to insert a checkbox

Introduction
The checkbox enables the operator to select several options and to check the corresponding
checkboxes. Checkboxes can be activated by default so the user changes the default values
only as required. A checkbox is integrated into the process by providing the corresponding
attributes with dynamics.
Inserting a checkbox
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert a checkbox.
In the Object Palette, click on the Windows object "Checkbox".
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert a
checkbox.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the checkbox to the required size.
Alternatively you can double-click the Windows object "Checkbox" in the object palette. A
checkbox with default object properties is then inserted near the picture origin.
If you hold down the <SHIFT> key during insertion, the "Checkbox" object is created in the
shape of a square.
Changing a checkbox
Select an object of the checkbox type if you wish to carry out one of the following changes:

the picture.
the object.
Attributes
Setting number of boxes
The "Number of Boxes" specifies the total number of boxes for the selected object. For each
object, a maximum number of 32 boxes can be set.
At the same time, the value of the "Number of Boxes" attribute specifies the upper limit
value for the "Index" attribute in the "Font" property group. Changing the value can have the
following effects:
Increasing the number
New boxes are inserted below the box with highest value of the "Index" attribute. The
standard labeling of the new box can be changed using the "Text" attribute in the "Font"
property group.
Reducing the number
All boxes with the value of the "Index" attribute higher than the new number are deleted.
Specifying selected boxes
The "Selected Boxes" attribute sets which fields in a checkbox are to be shown as enabled.
Multiple boxes can be enabled simultaneously.
Each field is represented by a bit in a 32-bit word. In order to activate a field, the
corresponding bit must have the value "1". The 32-bit word contains the information for all
fields of the checkbox. The value of the attribute "Selected Boxes" is specified in
hexadecimals.
How to insert an option box

Introduction
The option box enables the operator to selected one of the presented options and to activate
the corresponding options field. One of the option groups can be activated by default so the
user changes the default values only as required. An option box is integrated into the process
by providing the corresponding attributes with dynamics.
Inserting Option Group
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert an option group.
In the Object Palette, click on the Windows object "Option Group".
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert an option
group.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the option group to the required size.
Alternatively you can double-click the Windows object "Option Group" in the object palette.
An option group with default object properties is then inserted near the picture origin.
If you hold down the <SHIFT> key during insertion, the "Option Group" object is created in
Changing Option Group

Select an object of the option group type if you wish to carry out one of the following
changes:
the picture.
the object.
Attributes
Setting the number of boxes
The "Number of Boxes" specifies the total number of boxes for the selected object. For each
object, a maximum number of 32 boxes can be set.
At the same time, the value of the "Number of Boxes" attribute specifies the upper limit
value for the "Index" attribute in the "Font" property group. Changing the value can have the
following effects:
Increasing the number
New boxes are inserted below the box with highest value of the "Index" attribute. The
standard labeling of the new box can be changed using the "Text" attribute in the "Font"
property group.
Reducing the number
All boxes with the value of the "Index" attribute higher than the new number are deleted.
Setting selected boxes
The "Selected Box" attribute sets which option field in an option group is displayed as
activated. Only one of the boxes can be enabled.
Each field is represented by a bit in a 32-bit word. In order to activate a field, the
corresponding bit must have the value "1". The 32-bit word contains the information for all
fields of the checkbox. The value of the attribute "Selected Box" is specified in
hexadecimals.
How to insert a round button

Introduction
The round button enables process operation. For example, it is used to acknowlege messages.
A round button can have three different states: "On", "Off" and "Deactivated". It is also
possible to define whether a round button should by default be displayed as pressed and
whether it should click when pressed. A round button is integrated into the process by making
the corresponding attributes dynamic
Inserting a round button
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert a round button.
In the Object Palette, click on the Windows object "Round Button".
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert a round
button.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the round button to the required size.
Alternatively you can double-click the Windows object "Round Button" in the object palette.
A round button with default object properties is then inserted near the picture origin.
Changing a round button

Select an object of the round button type if you wish to carry out one of the following
changes:
the picture.
the object.
Attributes
How to insert a button

Introduction
The button enables process operation. A button is used for such actions as acknowledging
messages or for navigation in runtime. A button can have two different states: "On" and
"Off". A button is integrated into the process by providing the corresponding attributes with
dynamics.
Inserting a button
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert a button.
In the Object Palette, click on the Windows object "Button".
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert a button.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the button to the required size.
The "Button Configuration" dialog opens.

The insertion process for the "Button" object is finished.
Alternatively you can double-click the Windows object "Button" in the object palette. A
button with default object properties is then inserted near the picture origin. The "Button
with "OK".
If you hold down the <SHIFT> key during insertion, the "Button" object is created in the
shape of a square.
Changing a button
Select an object of the button type if you wish to carry out one of the following changes:
the picture.
the object.
Attributes
How to configure a button

Introduction
The "Button Configuration" dialog opens at the end of the insertion process if the use of
enables fast configuration of the important features of the button.
Text
The button can display a text that describes its function.
Enter the desired text. Only one text line is available in the configuration dialog. Multiline
text can be input by changing the "Text" attribute in the "Object Properties" window. You can
find the detailed description in the "Changing field labels with the "Text" attribute" section.
Font
The text display font can be changed.
Click one of the two possible buttons to open the associated dialogs. You can find the
detailed description of the dialogs in the sections "Changing the Font" and "Changing Font
Color".
Operation
An authorization can be assigned for operation of the button. A hot key can also be defined
for the button, which allows operation with a key or key combination.
Click one of the two possible buttons to open the associated dialogs. You can find the
detailed description of the dialogs in the "Set hot key for navigation in runtime" section.
Change Picture on Mouse Click
An event can be designed for the selected button with this function. If the button is clicked
with the mouse, the display of the process picture specified here is opened.
Enter the name of the desired picture or click on the
symbol to open the "Pictures:"
dialog to select a picture. The "Pictures:" dialog shows all pictures of the PDL format that are
in the "GraCS" graphics directory of the current WinCC project.
You can find the detailed description in "Making Process Pictures Dynamic".
Note:
You must not use the "Change Picture on Mouse Click" function in the Basic Process Control
area.
How to configure a hot key for navigation in runtime

Introduction
The "Button" object is used to open a configured event. For example, objects of the button
type can be placed between multiple pictures.
The configured change to another process picture is made as soon as the button is clicked
with the mouse in runtime. This event can also be triggered by a keyboard operation if a
specific key or key combination was configured for the button with the "Hot Key" attribute.
An authorization can also be assigned for operation of the button.
Configuring change picture
The change picture is configured with a constant for the mouse-click event as direct
connection. If the button is clicked with the mouse, the process picture display specified here
is opened.
The name of the picture that you want to display can be configured in the "Insert Button"
dialog. Alternatively you can also change the configured direct connection in the "Events"
tab of the "Object Properties" window. You can find the detailed description in "Making
Process Pictures Dynamic".
Setting hot keys
As an alternative to operation with the mouse, a button can also be triggered using the
keyboard. To do so, a hotkey must be set.
Double-click on the "Hot key" attribute in the "Miscellaneous" property group of the "Object
Properties" window. Select one of the function keys with the mouse or enter a key or key
combination. If a hotkey has been defined for a button, an arrow is displayed in the object
properties beside the "Hotkey" attribute.
Note:
If a group is to be operated with a hot key, the hot key must be assigned to the single
"Button" object in the group only. A hot key assigned to the entire group will not work in
runtime.
Setting authorizations
The User Administrator editor is used in WinCC to assign authorizations for the users. An
authorization can be assigned for every object in the Graphics Designer. Only the user with
the appropriate authorization can operate this object.
Double-click on the "Authorization" attribute in the "Miscellaneous" property group of the
"Object Properties" window. Select one of the available authorizations.
Note:
To operate the button in runtime, the "Operator-Control Enable" and "Display" attributes
must have the value "Yes". The value of the "Authorization" attribute must contain the access
authorization of the current user.
How to insert a slider

Introduction
The slider is a slide controller and can be used to control processes. For example, it can be
used for infinitely variable changes to a value. A slider is integrated into the process by
providing the corresponding attributes with dynamics.
Inserting a slider
Procedure
1
Open the picture in which you want to insert a slider.
In the Object Palette, click on the Windows object "Slider".
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert a slider.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the slider to the required size.
The "Slider Configuration" dialog opens.

The insertion process for the "Slider" object is finished.
Alternatively you can double-click the Windows object "Slider" in the object palette. A slider
with default object properties is then inserted near the picture origin. The "Slider
with "OK".
If you hold down the <SHIFT> key during insertion, the "Slider" object is created in the
shape of a square.
Changing a slider
Select an object of the slider type if you wish to carry out one of the following changes:

the picture.
the object.
Use the Color Palette to change the background color of the border.
Attributes
How to configure a slider

Introduction
The "Slider Configuration" dialog opens after the insertion process if the use of configuration
dialogs is enabled in the "Options" tab of the "Tools / Settings..." menu. It enables fast
configuration of the important features of the slider.
Tag
The slider can made dynamic by embedding a tag.
Enter the name of the desired tag or click on the
symbol to open the "Tags - Project: ..."
dialog to select a tag. See the "Select Tag" section for the detailed description.
Update
The frequency of updating the value displayed by the slider can be configured.
Enter the desired interval or select an interval from the dropdown list. See the "Changing
update cycle" section for the detailed description.
Limits
The two holders of the slider are specified by the maximum value and the minimum value of
the slider. Setting operation steps specifies the number of increments by which the slider is
moved when the mouse is clicked on the slider.
Enter the desired limits and the number of operation steps for displaying the slider.
Alignment
Specify whether the slider is moved horizontally or vertically.
How to configure the value range and operation of a slider

Introduction
The value range of the required operation steps and the appearance of the "Slider" object can
be configured as required by changing the relevant attributes.
Setting scale end values and zero point value
The "Maximum value" attribute specifies the absolute value for displaying the highest value.
The "Minimum value" attribute specifies the absolute value for displaying the lowest value.
The "Zero Point Value" attribute specifies the absolute value for the zero point of the bar.
Operation Steps
The "Operation Steps" attribute specifies for the slider the number of steps the slider is
moved in the corresponding direction with one mouse-click on the slide surface.
The number of times the slide surface has to be clicked to move the slider from one end to
the other is calculated as follows:
("Maximum Value" "Minimum Value") / "Operation Steps".
Example:
With maximum value = 100, minimum value = 0, operation steps = 25, the slide surface must
be clicked four times to move the slider from one end to the other.
Alignment
The "Alignment" attribute defines for the "Slider" object whether the movement of the slider
is in a horizontal or vertical direction.
Windows Style
The "Windows Style" attribute specifies whether the style for displaying the objects in the
Graphics Designer is set or the operating system defaults are used.
Working with Controls

Contents
ActiveX controls offer the option of integrating elements for controlling and monitoring
system processes into a process picture. All ActiveX controls that are registered in the
operating system are available for use in WinCC. This also applies for controls from other
manufacturers. However, in this chapter only the use of controls provided by WinCC is
explained.
The controls provided by WinCC can be changed as required and embedded dynamically in
the process. The size and properties which a control accepts in Runtime are defined in the
Graphics Designer.
This chapter shows you
how to register controls in the operating system,

how to embed and configure controls in process pictures with the Graphics Designer
editor,
how to use controls.
Short Description of the WinCC Controls and Additional Controls
Introduction
ActiveX Controls serve for the monitoring and visualization of measured values and
system parameters. By appropriate dynamics they can be employed as control
elements of the process control.
The WinCC Controls and Symbol Library are installed during installation of WinCC.
Overview
Detailed descriptions on the following controls can be viewed via the links in the
Menu Bar.
Control
Abbreviation
Function
Siemens HMI Symbol Symbol Library

Library
The Symbol Library contains a comprehensive

collection of ready symbols for the display of
systems and system components in process screens.
WinCC Alarm Control Alarm Control
Alarm Control can be used to display messages

during runtime.
WinCC Digital/Analog Clock Control

Clock Control
The Clock Control can be used to integrate a time

display into a process picture.
WinCC Function
Trend Control
The Trend Control function can be used display the

values of tags as functions of other tags and
Function Trend
Control
compare the trend with the setpoint trend.

WinCC Gauge Control Gauge Control
The Gauge Control can be used to display the

monitored measurement values in the form of an
analog measurement clock.
WinCC Online Table

Control
Online Table
Control
The online Table Control can be used to display

values from archive tags tablular form.
WinCC Online Trend Online Trend

Control
Control
The online Trend Control can be used to display

values from tags and archive tags as trends.
WinCC Push Button

Control
The Push Button can be used to configure a

command button, which is connected to the
execution of a specific command.
Push Button
WinCC Slider Control Slider Control
The Slider Control can be used to display the

monitored measurement values in the form of a
slider control.
WinCC User Archives User Archives

Table Element
Table Element
The User Archives Table element provides options

to access user archives and views of the user
archives.
How to Insert a Control as a Smart Object

Introduction
An ActiveX control is inserted from the object palette into a process screen. Controls can be
entered as Smart Object or from the tab "Controls".
If the Smart Object "Control" is inserted, the selection of the desired control is done during
the insertion process from the dialog "Insert Control". Here you can see all ActiveX controls
that are registered in the operating system.
Caution
The use of ActiveX Controls from third party providers can lead to errors as well as drops in
performance or system blocks. The user of the software is responsible for problems cause by
the deployment of external ActiveX Controls.
We recommend you to do a check on safe functioning before use.
At the end of the insertion process normally a configuration dialog is opened, which the
properties of the control are adapted to. This dialog can opened later by a double click on the
control. Detailed description of the configuration dialog can be found in the descriptions of
the related controls.
control with a consecutive number. This name can be changed with the attribute "Object
Name" in the window "Object Properties".Procedure
Procedure
1
In the Object Palette, click on the smart object "Control".
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert a control.
3
The dialog "Insert a Control" is opened.
Select one of the controls that are registered in the operating system. Click on "OK" to
apply the selection.
Adopt the settings of the configuration dialog as needed. Confirm the input with "OK".
Double click in the object palette on the Smart Object "Control", in order to insert it with the
default properties into the process screen. Select the desired control in the dialog "Insert a
Control".
How to Insert a Control from the Tab "Controls"
Introduction
An ActiveX control is inserted from the object palette into a process screen. Controls can be
entered as Smart Object or from the tab "Controls".
If a control is inserted from the tab "Controls", the selection of the selected control is done at
the beginning of the insertion process. The tab "Controls" shows a default selection of
WinCC Controls, which can be inserted directly into a process screen. This control selection
can be configured if necessary.
At the end of the insertion process normally a configuration dialog is opened, which the
properties of the control are adapted to. This dialog can opened later by a double click on the
control. Detailed description of the configuration dialog can be found in the descriptions of
the related controls.
control with a consecutive number. This name can be changed with the attribute "Object
Name" in the window "Object Properties".
Procedure
Procedure
1
In the Object Palette, click on the tab "Control". Select the desired control.
Place the mouse pointer at the position in the picture where you want to insert the control.
Adapt the settings of the configuration dialog according to your needs and confirm the
entry with "OK".
The insertion process for the selected control is finished.
Double click in the object palette on the desired control, in order to insert it with the default
properties into the process screen.
Configuring the Control Selection of the Object Palette

Introduction
The tab "Controls" in the Object Palette of the Graphics Designer contains a selection of
Controls. These controls can be inserted directly into a picture.
With the help of the dialog "Select OCX Controls" you can change this selection according to
your needs. Individual controls can be removed from the selection. The list of the controls
can be completed with ActiveX controls, which are registered in the operating system.
Caution
The use of ActiveX Controls from third party providers can lead to errors as well as drops in
performance or system blocks. The user of the software is responsible for problems cause by
the deployment of external ActiveX Controls.
We recommend a complete check before the use.
The dialog "Select OCX Controls" shows in the area "Available OCX controls (number)" all
the ActiveX controls, which are registered in the operating system. The exact number is
shown in the title of the area after the registration has been read in. A red check marks the
controls, which are available in the tab "Controls" of the Object Palette. In the area "Details"
you can see the path and the program ID of the selected ActiveX controls.
Open the dialog "Select OCX Controls"
Click with the right mouse button on the tab "Controls". In the pop-up menu, select the entry
"Add / Remove". The dialog "Select OCX Controls" is opened.
You can open the dialog "Select OCX Controls" also from the WinCC Explorer. Click in the
navigation window with the right mouse button onto the entry "Graphics Designer". Select
the entry "Select ActiveX Control" in the pop-up menu
Adding ActiveX Controls to the Object Palette

Click in the area "Available OCX controls" onto the rectangular box next to the name of the
desired control. A red check mark shows that the control is available in the tab "Controls" of
the object palette, as soon as you confirm the change with "OK".
Removing ActiveX Controls from the Object Palette

Click in the area "Available OCX controls" onto the red check mark next to the name of the
desired control. The red check mark disappears. The related control is not available anymore
in the tab "Controls" of the Object Palette as soon as you confirm the change with "OK".
How to Change the Properties of Controls

Introduction
The properties of a control can be adopted according to your needs by:
Change of the attributes in the window "Object Properties"

Change of the Settings in the configuration dialog
Open the window "Object Properties"

In the pop-up menu of a control select the entry "Properties", in order to open the window
"Object Properties". The change of an attribute is executed immediately.
The detailed description of the window "Object Properties" is provided in the chapter "The
Window Object Properties".
Open configuration dialog
Double click on a control to open the related configuration dialog. Select a tab to carry out
the desired changes. Click on "Accept" in order to assign the new settings to the control.
Confirm your configuration with "OK" to close the dialog.
The configuration dialogs are explained in the detailed description of the related controls.
The "Siemens HMI Symbol Library" Control

Introduction
The control "Siemens HMI Symbol Library" contains a comprehensive collection of prepared
symbols. These symbols can be used for the display of systems and system components in
process screens.
Insert symbols of the Symbol Library

The symbols of the Symbol Library are inserted into a screen as a control from the Object
Palette or from the library of the Graphics Designer:
as Smart Object
The Smart Object "Control" is inserted from the tab "Standard" of the Object Palette.
The Symbol Library is selected in the dialog "Insert a Control".
The selection of the desired symbols is done after the insertion procedure in the
configuration dialog which is opened by a double click on the control.
from the tab "Controls"
The control "Siemens HMI Symbol Library" is inserted directly from the tab
"Controls" of the Object Palette.
The selection of the desired symbols is done after the insertion procedure in the
configuration dialog which is opened by a double click on the control.
from the library of the Graphics Designer
The control "Siemens HMI Symbol Library" is integrated as a unique folder into the
library of the Graphics Designer.
The desired symbol is selected directly and inserted from the library. The properties
of the symbols can be changed in the configuration dialog, which is opened by a
double click on the symbol.
Change the symbols of the Symbol Library

The properties of the symbols of the Symbol Library can be changed in the window "Object
Properties" and in the configuration dialog "Properties of Siemens HMI Symbol Library".
The window "Object Properties" is opened from the pop-up menu of the inserted object. The
dialog "Properties of Siemens HMI Symbol Library" is opened by a double click on the
symbol to be changed.
How to Select a Symbol of the Symbol Library

Introduction
You can use the tab "Symbols" in the dialog "Properties of Siemens HMI Symbol Library" to
replace the displayed symbol with another. The screen contents of the selected symbols is
changed by the selection of another symbol of the Symbol Library. The other properties of
the selected symbols are not changed.
Requirements
Open the dialog "Properties of Siemens HMI Symbol Library" with a double click on
the symbol to be changed.
Select the tab "Symbols".
Preview
In the area at the top left, the symbol selected in the selection will be displayed. All settings
of the dialog "Siemens HMI Symbol Library" are displayed in the preview.
Categories
In the area at the bottom left all categories containing symbols of the Symbol Library are
displayed.
Select the category that contains the desired symbol. In the selection all symbols of the
selected category are displayed.
Selection
The right area displays all the symbols available for the selected category.
Position the mouse pointer on a symbol, to show a short description.
Click on the desired symbol to select it. The selected symbol is displayed in the preview.
How to Change the Alignment

Introduction
You can use the tab "Style" in the dialog "Properties of Siemens HMI Symbol Library" to set
different options. The display and the alignment of the selected symbols can be customized.
In the area at the top left, the symbol selected in the selection of the tab "Symbols" will be
displayed. All settings of the dialog "Siemens HMI Symbol Library" are displayed in the
preview.
Requirements
Select the tab "Style".
:
Alignment
In the bottom left area the alignment of the symbol in the current screen can be changed. The
symbol can be reflected and rotated.
Set reflection
Open the drop-down list box and select the desired reflection type.
The reflecting of the screen contents are carried out on the horizontal or vertical central axis
of the symbol respectively. The reflection can be done horizontally, vertically or horizontally
and vertically at the same time.
Set rotation
Open the drop-down list box and select the desired angle for the rotation.
The rotation of the screen contents is done around the central axis of the symbol. The rotation
is done counter-clockwise in steps of 90, 180 or 270 degrees.
How to Change the Display Options

Introduction
You can use the tab "Style" in the dialog "Properties of Siemens HMI Symbol Library" to set
different options. The display and the alignment of the selected symbols can be customized.
In the area at the top left, the symbol selected in the selection of the tab "Symbols" will be
displayed. All settings of the dialog "Siemens HMI Symbol Library" are displayed in the
preview.
Requirements
Select the tab "Style".
Appearance form
Open the drop-down list box and select the desired appearance form for the screen contents.
Original
The appearance form of the symbol corresponds to the multi-colored display in the selection
of the tab "Symbols".
Shadow
Lines of the color "Black" are maintained as contour lines. Elements of the symbols in other
colors are displayed as light grades of the current foreground color.
Solid
Lines of the color "Black" are maintained as contour lines. All the elements of the symbol in
other colors are assigned the color value of the current foreground color.
Border
Lines of the color "Black" are maintained as contour lines. All the elements of the symbol in
other colors are assigned the color value of the background color.
Background
Open the drop-down list box and select the desired background type.
The background can be displayed either "Nontransparent" or "Transparent".
Customize
Click on the control box next to the option "Customize", in order to enable or to disable the
option.
When selecting the option "Customize", the screen contents are adapted to the object size of
the selected symbol.
Display mouse pointer

Click on the control box next to the option "Customize", in order to enable or to disable the
option.
When selecting the option "Display mouse pointer", the mouse pointer is not hidden in
runtime, if it is placed on the symbol.
How to Change the Colors

Introduction
Using the tab "Color" in the dialog "Properties of Siemens HMI Symbol Library" you can set
different color settings for the display of the selected symbol.
Requirements
Select the tab "Color".
Characteristics
Select the color attribute you want to change.
The "Blinking color" acquires the symbol in the blinking state. The flashing is only visible in
runtime. With the "Background Color" you can display the background of the symbol for the
background type "Nontransparent". In the appearance forms "Shadow" and "Solid", the
symbol is shown in the "Foreground color".
Color group
Select one of the color groups in the drop-down list box. The related colors are displayed in
the area "Color palette".
The color group "Standard colors" contains the 16 standard colors of the operating system
The color group "Windows system colors" contains the colors which are set in the operating
system currently as the display options in the system start.
Color palette
Select the desired color Click on "Accept" in order to assign the color to the color attribute.
Edit customized color
Click on this button to open the dialog "Colors". Depending on the graphic settings of the
operating system you can define the desired color freely.
The "WinCC Digital/Analog Clock" Control

Introduction
With the "WinCC Digital/Analog Clock" control you can integrate a time display into a
process screen. In runtime the current system time of the operating system is displayed. The
time can be displayed as analog or digital. In addition, the digital display contains the current
date.
Insert a Clock Control

The clock control is inserted from the object palette into a screen:
as Smart Object
The Clock Control is selected in the dialog "Insert a Control".

The Clock Control is inserted directly from the tab "Controls" of the Object Palette.
The properties of the control are changed in the configuration dialog "Properties of the
WinCC Digital/Analog Clock Control" or in the window "Object Properties".
How to Change the Appearance Screen of the Clock Controls

Introduction
You can use the tab "General" to adopt the general appearance screen of the Clock Controls.
In addition, the geometry of the pointers can be changed.
Requirements
Double click on the control to open the "Properties of WinCC Digital/Analog

Control" dialog.
Select the "General " tab.
Pointer Width in %
For the analog display you can set the width of second, minute and hour display. The values
are understood as percent share of the pointer length.
Pointer Length in %
For the analog display you can set the length of second, minute and hour display. The values
are understood as percent spare at the radius of the dial.
Analog Display
Select between analog and digital display of the clock.
Dial
Hide or unhide the hour marks for the analog display.
Square
Select whether the analog clock shall be displayed always in square form.
Line Pointer
Specify whether for the analog display only the border or also the filling color of the pointer
will be displayed.
Background Style
Select "Nontransparent" in order to display the analog clock with a frame. With "Transparent
Border" the colored Dial is displayed without border. Select "Transparent", in order to
display the analog clock without background.
How to Change the Font of the Digital Display

Introduction
You can use the tab "Font" to adopt the font to the digital display of the clock. This setting
has no effect on the analog display of the Clock Control.
Requirements

Control" dialog.
Select the tab "Font".
Characteristics
The currently selected property is displayed.
Font
Select the desired font for the digital display of the clock from the drop-down list box. You
can use any of the fonts registered in the operating system.
Font size
Select the desired font size for the digital display of the clock from the drop-down list box.
You can also input the type size directly into the field. The value is specified in the unit
points (pt).
Display
Select one or more display options.
The select font can be displayed in "Bold", "Italic", "Underlined" and "Strikethrough".
Sample text
The selected settings are displayed in a preview.
How to Change the Colors on the Clock Controls

Introduction
Use the "Colors" tab to adapt the colors for displaying the clock. For the digital display of the
Clock Controls only the color attribute "Foreground color" (font color) is relevant.
Requirements

Control" dialog.
Characteristics
Color group
Color palette
How to Change the Background Image of the Clock Controls

Introduction
You can use the tab "Screen" to assign a background image to the analog or the digital
display of the clock. In the area "Preview" the current image is displayed.
Requirements

Control" dialog.
Select the "Image " tab.
Browse
Click on "Browse", in order to open the dialog "Find picture". Select the graphic file, which
you want to assign the selected property to.
You can use graphic files of the following formats:
BMP, DIB, ICO, CUR, EMF, WMF, GIF and JPG
Delete
Click on "Delete", in order to delete the assigned image.
The "WinCC Gauge" Control

Introduction
The "WinCC Gauge" control is used to display the monitored measurement values in the
form of an analog measurement clock. Warning and danger areas as well as the extreme
values of the pointer movement can be marked in colors.
Insert a Gauge Control

The gauge control is inserted from the object palette into a screen:
as Smart Object
The Control is selected in the dialog "Insert a Control".

The Gauge Control is inserted directly from the tab "Controls" of the Object Palette.
Change important properties

The properties of the control are changed in the configuration dialog "Properties of the
WinCC Gauge Control" or in the window "Object Properties".
The following attributes can be changed only in the window "Object Properties":
Labeling
Enter a text to display, for example, the type of the controlled value on the gauge. As a
standard, you must enter the label "SIMATIC".
Unit text
Enter a text to display, for example, the physical unit of the displayed value on the gauge. As
a standard, there is no default text set here.
Unit offset
Specify the position for the display of the physical unit on the gauge. The value is given in
decimal form. The value is the percent share on the object height, starting from the topmost
border line of the rectangle encompassing the object.
How to Change the Appearance Screen of the Gauge Controls

Introduction
You can use the tab "General" to adopt the general appearance screen of the Gauge Controls.
Requirements
Double click on the control to open the "Properties of WinCC Gauge Control" dialog.
Central point size

Specify the radius for the display of the central point. The value is given in decimal form as
percent share on the diameter of the gauge.
Labeling offset
Specify the position for the labeling of the gauge. The value is given in decimal form. The
value is the percent share on the object height, starting from the topmost border line of the
rectangle encompassing the object.
Slave Pointer
For the maximum and the minimum pointer movement a marker function can be activated,
which marks the real measurement area in runtime with colored lines:
A green line marks the minimum pointer movement.

A red line marks the maximum pointer movement.
Square
Select whether the gauge shall be displayed always in square form.
Background Style
Select "Nontransparent" in order to display the gauge with a frame."Transparent Border"
hides the frame. With "Transparent" only the scale of the gauge will be displayed.
Mouse Control
The mouse pointer can be shown in runtime, if it is placed on the symbol.
How to Configure the Scale of the Gauge Control
Introduction
With the tab "General" you can set the measurement area to be controlled. In addition, you
can configure the display of the scale.
Requirements
Minimum Value
Specify the lower limit value of the measurement area. This value is displayed as the bottom
scale end value.
Maximum Value
Specify the upper limit value of the measurement area. This value is displayed as the upper
scale end value.
Value
Specify a start value for the pointer of the gauge. If Process Driver Connections are missing,
this value is shown in runtime.
Minimum angle
Enter the angle for the display of the scale start. The value is given in degrees, starting from
the zero state.
Maximum angle
Enter the angle for the display of the scale end. The value is given in degrees, starting from
the zero state.
Line width
Enter the distance of the main part lines as the difference of two neighbor measurement
values. The area between two main part lines is divided by default by a wider part line of half
the length.
Scale width
Specify the length of the main part line and therefore the width of the scale. The value is
given in decimal form as percent share on the radius of the gauge.
Scale offset
Specify the outer radius of the scale. The value is given in decimal form as percent share on
the radius of the gauge.
Line text offset
Specify the inner radius of the scale labeling. The value is given in decimal form as percent
share on the radius of the gauge.
Decimal Point
The values of the scale labeling can be displayed as whole numbers or as decimal numbers
with one decimal place.
How to Mark Special Data Ranges

Introduction
You can use the tab "General" to highlight special range of values in the scale in colors.
Requirements
Select the "General" tab.
Danger
Set the limit value for the start of the danger area.
Warning
Set the limit value for the start of the warning area.
Danger Display
The scale area starting at the limit value "Danger" can be shown in the "Danger color"
(default: red).
Caution Display
The scale area starting at the limit value "Warning" can be shown in the "Warning color"
(default: yellow).
Normal Display
The scale area ending at the limit value "Warning" can be shown in the Normal "color"
(default: green).
How to Configure the Fonts of the Gauge Control

Introduction
You can use the tab "Font" to adopt the fonts for the different labeling elements of the gauge.
Requirements
Select the tab "Font".
Characteristics
Select the labeling attribute you want to change.
Select the "Labeling font", in order to change the font for the name of the gauge. "Unit font"
changes the font for the display of the physical unit. You can configure the scale labeling
with the "Scale text font".
Font
Select from the drop-down list box the desired font for the selected labeling attribute. You
can use any of the fonts registered in the operating system.
Font size
Select from the drop-down list box the desired font size for the selected labeling attribute.
You can also input the type size directly into the field. The value is specified in the unit
points (pt).
Display
Select one or more display options.
The select font can be displayed in "Bold", "Italic", "Underlined" and "Strikethrough".
Sample text
The selected settings are displayed in a preview.
How to Configure the Scale of the Gauge Controls
Introduction
Use the "Color" tab to adapt the colors for displaying the gauge control.
Requirements
Characteristics
Color group
Color palette
How to Assign Images to the Gauge Control

Introduction
You can use the tab "Image" to assign a background and a border image to the Gauge.
Requirements
Select the "Image " tab.
Characteristics
Select the property for which you want to change the image assignment. In the area
"Preview" the current image is displayed.
You can use the "Background image" to assign an image to the circle formed background of
the gauge. With "Border image" you can assign an image the rectangular background of the
control.
Browse
Click on "Browse", in order to open the dialog "Find picture". Select the graphic file, which
you want to assign the selected property to.
You can use graphic files of the following formats:
BMP, DIB, ICO, CUR, EMF, WMF, GIF and JPG
Delete
Click on "Delete", in order to delete the assigned image.
Testing Process Pictures in Runtime

Introduction
The behavior of process pictures, which were created and dynamized in Graphics Designer,
can be tested in runtime. Some object properties, such as the rotation or flashing of an object,
can only be displayed in runtime.
In this chapter, you will learn how to
activate and deactivate runtime

test changes to a picture in directly runtime
modify the settings for the execution of runtime
How to activate / deactivate runtime

Introduction
Runtime can be activated from WinCC Explorer or Graphics Designer. If it is called in
WinCC Explorer, runtime will start with the predefined start picture. If it is started from
Graphics Designer, the active picture will be opened in runtime. Runtime can only be
deactivated from WinCC Explorer.
Requirements

The local computer's name must be entered as the computer name in the project.
A process picture, which is found in the project, must be defined as the start picture.
Changes in a picture can only be displayed in runtime, when the picture was saved
before runtime was activated.
Activating Runtime
Runtime is executed in the "WinCC-Runtime" program window. The "Runtime" command is
used to load additional program modules, which are required for the execution of runtime.
WinCC Explorer
Click on this button in the toolbar to open runtime with the predefined start picture.
As an alternative, you can select "Activate" in the "File" menu. When runtime is activated
this will be indicated by a tick in front of the entry "Activate".
Graphics Designer
Click on this button in the default toolbar to open runtime with the active picture.
As an alternative, you can select "Runtime" in the "File" menu.
Deactivating Runtime
Runtime can only be deactivated from WinCC Explorer.
Click on this button in the toolbar to deactivate runtime.

The module for executing runtime will be deactivated. The "WinCC-Runtime"
program window will be closed.
As an alternative, you can select "Activate" in the "File" menu. The tick in front of the entry
"Activate" will be removed.
How to test the active picture in runtime
Introduction
The behavior of process pictures, which were created and dynamized in Graphics Designer,
can be tested in runtime. Furthermore, changes made to the configuration of a picture can be
checked directly in runtime.
Prerequisite
Runtime must be activated.

To start runtime directly with the active picture, it must be activated from Graphics
Designer.
To test - in runtime - the changes made, the active picture must first be saved.
Procedure
Procedure
1
Open the picture that you want to change.
Change the desired Properties and Events.
Click on the
button in the default toolbar.
The active picture will be saved with the changes you made.
Click on the
button in the default toolbar.
The active picture will be activated in runtime and can be tested in the "WinCC-Runtime"
program window.
Repeat steps 2 - 4 to make further changes.
How to set up runtime

Introduction
To test a WinCC project in runtime, first setup the project's applications and operator
functions that available in runtime. These project settings must be adjusted for every
computer on which the project should run.
Using the "Computer properties" dialog, which is opened from WinCC Explorer, you can
make the following project settings:
"General"
tabbed card Configure the computer names and types
"Startup" tabbed card

Set the modules and applications, which should be started with the "Runtime"
command
"Parameters"
tabbed card Change the presettings in runtime for language and time and disable
certain key-combinations
"Graphics Runtime"
tabbed card Change the presettings for the operation of process pictures in runtime
"Runtime"
tabbed card User-specific settings for all WinCC projects run on this computer
Prerequisite
Open the "Computer properties" dialog
Procedure
In WinCC Explorer's navigation window, select "Computer".
All of the computer, which are available for the current project, will be displayed in the
data window.
In WinCC Explorer's data window, double-click on the desired computer.

The "Computer properties" dialog will open.
How to change the computer name

Introduction
To test a WinCC project in runtime, the local computer name must be entered as a computer
name in the project.
The computer name is changed on the "General" tabbed card in the "Computer properties"
dialog.
Prerequisite

The "Computer properties" dialog must be open.
Procedure
Procedure
Click on the "General" tab.
1
Enter the name of the computer in the "Computer name" field.
In the "Computer Type" area, define which function is performed by this computer.
Click on "OK" to confirm your entries.

The changed computer name will not be applied until WinCC is restarted.
How to configure the applications available in runtime

Introduction
The "Runtime" command is used to load additional program modules, which are required for
the execution of runtime. To ensure the maximum performance, activate only the applications
that are actually needed in runtime.
The applications, which will be available in runtime, are configured on the "Startup" tabbed
card in the "Computer properties" dialog.
How to Change Presettings for Language, Time and Key

Combinations
Introduction
The configured language and the display mode for the time can be preset before activating
runtime. It is also possible to disable specific key-combinations.
The presettings for language, time and key-combinations are configured on the "Parameters"
tabbed card in the "Computer properties" dialog.
Language Setting at Run Time

Select the language with which the project should be activated in runtime on the selected
computer.
Default Language at Runtime

Select the alternate language in which the text of graphics objects is supposed to be displayed
if the respective translations do not exist in the language specified under "Language Setting
at Runtime".
Disable Keys
To prevent operator errors in runtime, Windows-typical key-combinations can be disabled.

Place a tick in the check box to disable the associated key-combination in runtime.
PLC Time Setting
Select the time setting that is valid for the PLC. A detailed description can be found in the
chapter entitled "Time Settings in WinCC".
Time base for the time shown in runtime
Select the mode for displaying the time in runtime and in the report system. The following
options are available "Local time zone", "Coordinated world time (UTC)" and "Server's time
zone".
Central Date and Time Formatting
Specify if date and time formatting should be configured at the components or if it should be
forced at all components using the ISO 86091 format. A detailed description can be found in
the chapter entitled "Time Settings in WinCC".
How to define hotkeys for operation and screen navigation

Introduction
Process pictures can also be operated when a mouse is not available. For this purpose, keycombinations must be defined to call the required operator functions.
The most important hotkeys for mouseless operation in runtime are set on the "Graphics
Runtime" tabbed card in the "Computer properties" dialog.
Procedure
Procedure
1
Click in the entry field for the desired function to activate it for the entry of a hotkey
(combination).
Press the desired combination key and hold it depressed.

The <CTRL>, <ALT> or <SHIFT> key can be used as a combination key.
Now also press the key which should call the function.
The selected key-combination (for example, <ALT+F>) will now be displayed in the
entry field.
If you want to change your entry, click in the entry field again.
As an alternative, you can enter a single key or a function key <F1> - <F12> instead of a
key-combination.
Note:
The function key F12 may not be configured as a systemwide hotkey.
Hotkeys
Changes made to the hotkeys are first effective after the system has been restarted.
Window On Top
This hotkey is used to navigate between multiple picture windows, which are configured in a
main picture. Whenever the hotkey is pressed, the next picture window will be activated for
an operation.
Tab or Alpha Cursor
This hotkey toggles the "Cursor Mode" attribute. With this hotkey, a process picture can be
operated with both an alpha cursor and a tab order cursor. A tab sequence must be configured
for both types of cursors.
Runtime-Cursor On/Off
By default the selected object in runtime will not be highlighted. This hotkey can be used to
activate a runtime cursor, which will highlight the currently selected object with a frame.
Note:
The <DEL> and <POS1> keys cannot be used as hotkeys.
Screen Navigation
In all common Internet browsers, the "Forward" and "Back" buttons make it easy to switch
between Internet pages, which were recently examined. A similar technique can be
implemented in WinCC to navigate between individual process pictures.
In the "Screen Navigation" area, you can configure hotkeys that will make it easy for you to
switch between the most recently called process pictures in runtime. Process pictures will be
recorded in a temporary list whenever they are called. With the "Forwards" and "Backwards"
functions, you can page through this list to, for example, call the last five pictures once again.
The maximum permissible number of entries in this list is set in the field "Picture Buffer
Size". If this number is exceeded, the oldest entry will be replaced when a new picture is
called.
You can define hotkeys for the following functions:
"Forward": Calls the next configured process picture

"Backward": Calls the previous configured process picture
"Start picture": calls the picture that has been defined as the start picture
"Recall Picture": calls the picture that was last marked with the function "Store
Picture"
"Store Picture": function for storing the currently displayed picture
Note:
With the default value for "Picture Buffer Size", the list will record the calls for a maximum
of 30 pictures. As a rule, it is not reasonable to substantially increase this value, since the
switchover can only be done in single steps. You can achieve more efficient screen
navigation using picture modules.
How to define a picture as the start picture in runtime

Introduction
Runtime can only be started, when one of the project's process pictures has been defined as
the start picture. This start picture will be displayed when runtime is activated from WinCC
Explorer.
The start picture is defined on the "Graphics Runtime" tabbed card in the "Computer
properties" dialog.
Prerequisite

The "Computer properties" dialog must be open.
Procedure
In the "Start picture" field, enter the name of the desired picture file in the PDL format or
click on the "Find..." button to select it.
Procedure
1
Click in WinCC Explorer's navigation window on the entry for "Graphics Designer".
All the illustrations of the current project are displayed in the data window (format PDL).
Now right click on the desired picture and select "Define screen as start screen".
The selected picture will be entered in the "Start picture" field on the "Graphics Runtime"
tabbed card.
How to Activate Zoom Functions in Runtime

Introduction
Zooming in Runtime is supported by three techniques:
Decluttering
Layers and objects placed there may be masked and unmasked. Limit values for
masking and unmasking of objects are specified in menu "Tools>Settings" on the
"Hide/Show" tab of Graphics Designer.
Extended zooming
The view of the process picture in Runtime may be zoomed in or out using the mouse
wheel. Hold the <Alt> key down while turning the mouse wheel. If you turn the
mouse wheel away from the palm of your hand, you increase the zoom factor.
Panning
If the picture has been assigned a zoom factor which displays the picture with scroll
bars, you may move a picture segment within the document. A navigation crosshair
appears upon clicking on the mouse wheel. Moving the mouse pointer scrolls in the
desired direction. The distance between mouse pointer and navigation crosshair
determines the scrolling speed. Another click will deactivate panning.
Conditions for Using Zoom Function:
a mouse driver by Logitech or Microsoft Intellimouse
mouse wheel must be set to "Autoscroll".
Both functions Decluttering and Extended Zooming may be turned off in the "Graphics
Runtime" tab of the "Computer Properties" dialog. Activate the checkboxes of both
respective entries in the area "Turn off". In the default setting the checkboxes are deactivated,
i.e. the functions Decluttering and Extended Zooming are turned on.
Configuring Extended Zooming Picture-Specific
The function Extended Zooming may be turned on or off picture-specific. The setting is
specified in the object properties of the selected picture in the "Miscellaneous" property
group.
If you turn of the function Extended Zooming for a process picture, Extended Zooming must
also be turned on for all process pictures in the "Graphics Runtime" tab of the "Computer
Properties" dialog.
A detailed description of the zoom function may be found in Chapter "Showing and Hiding
Layers and Objects".
Note:
WinCC Controls cannot be decluttered, except for "WinCC Slider Control", "WinCC Push
Button Control", "WinCC Clock Control" and "WinCC Gauge Control".
CHAPTER-Iv
Setting Up an Alarm System

Alarm Logging in WinCC.
Contents
The "Alarm Logging" editor is responsible for message acquisition and archiving and
contains functions for accepting messages from processes regarding their processing, display,
acknowledgement and archiving.
Alarm logging
Provides in-depth information about alarm and event states

Is used for an early warning of critical situations
Results in avoidance and reduction of down times
Enhances quality
Provides specific documentation of alarm and event states
Alarm Logging in WinCC

Introduction
The message system processes results from functions which monitor actions in the process,
on the automation level and in the WinCC System. The message system indicates alarm
events recorded both visually and acoustically, and archives them electronically and on paper.
Freely selectable access to messages and supplementary information on individual messages
ensure that faults are localized and cleared quickly.
Archiving
Depending on the message class, changes which occur in message states are written to
configurable archives.
Archiving is completed in the message archive. In order to do so, different parameters such
as archive size, time range, switchover time, etc. are set. If any of the configured criteria are
exceeded, the oldest messages in the archive are overwritten. The backup of the archiving
databases can be set with the help of additional settings.
Display of messages saved in a message archive takes place in a long-term archive list or a
short-term archive list. Display of messages in the short-term archive list is updated
immediately upon receipt of a new incoming message.
An operation in the process can trigger an operator input message.
The configuration of an operator input message depends on the place of the operation:
For the operation of certain objects such as for entering a value into a I/O field, the
"Operator Input Message" property can be activated for these objects in the Graphics
Designer. This is done by setting the "Operator Input Message" attribute. The
message structure cannot be edited. The message number of the operator input
message is "12508141". The operator input message contains the value before the
operation (old value) in the process value block 2 and the changed value (new value)
in the process value block 3.
By activating the "Operator Activities Report" attribute, the user can enter the reason
for the operation as a comment on the message in a dialog after an operation has been
completed. The "Operator Activities Report" comment is displayed in the long-term
archive list by clicking the "Comment" button. The Comment dialog only shows the
old value and new value for the operator input message "12508141".
For the operation of a message such as acknowledgment and locking/enabling, an
operator input message is configured in the WinCC Alarm Logging. In order to do so,
the WinCC system messages must be created in the Alarm Logging Editor.
An operator input message by default may contain information on registered user and
current computer. To do so, insert system blocks "User Name" and "Computer Name"
to the message blocks in the Alarm Logging editor. In Alarm Control you add the
system blocks of the "Message List" tab to the selected message blocks.
The triggering events for an operator input message are activated in WinCC Alarm
Control on the "Message Lists" tab using the "Operator Input Message" button. There
you may also configure the operator input message yourself.
In order to display or enter a comment on a selected operator input message, you may
open a dialog in the long-term archive list using the "Comment" button. When the
"Comment" system block in the Alarm Control is entered in the message line, this
message block indicates the existence of a comment concerning this message.
Single Message, Group Message

Two forms of message are distinguished in Alarm Logging:
Single messages. Each event is assigned to a message.

Group messages are used to summarize multiple single messages. In the case of group
messages with message classes, all the associated messages and message types are
stored. By using user-defined group messages, you can combine any single messages
to group messages which can then be combined to form superordinated group
messages.
Single Acknowledgment, Group Acknowledgment

A pending message can be acknowledged in one of two ways:
Messages which do not possess the "group acknowledgment" attribute must be

acknowledged individually.
Group acknowledgment can be used to collectively acknowledge all individual

messages possessing the "group acknowledgment" attribute which are visible in a
Message Window.
The report of the acknowledgment of a message can be initiated by stating the acknowledged
user and the computer used for it. To do so, the "User Name" and "Computer Name" system
blocks must be entered in the message line of a message in the WinCC Alarm Control. Upon
acknowledgment of a message, user name and computer name are not displayed in the
message line of the incoming message but in the operator input message of the
acknowledgment in the short-term and long-term archive list. The operator input message
must be activated in WinCC Alarm Control on the "Message Lists" tab using the "Operator
Input Message" button.
Events
The message system distinguishes between binary events and monitoring events:
Binary events are changes in the state of internal or external tags.

Monitoring events are not directly supported by Alarm Logging. Monitoring events
include: overflow of archives and hard disks, printer messages, server failure, faulty
process communication.
Initial Value Message, New Value Message
The term initial value message is used to describe a form of message processing in
which the first message in a list of messages which underwent a state change since
the last acknowledgment is highlighted.
The term new value message is used to describe a form of message processing in
which the messages in a list of messages which have undergone a state change since
the last acknowledgment are highlighted.
Messages
The purpose of the message system is to chronologically signal and archive events, which
occur sporadically during the process, at a central point. A message can be caused by an
event or a message frame.
The message system distinguishes between three message types:
Operating messages are used for displaying a state in the process

Error messages are used for displaying an error in the process.
System messages are used for displaying error messages from other applications.
In Alarm Logging, messages with similar behavior, e.g. a similar acknowledgment theory or
color of message states, can be grouped into message classes and message types.
Message Classes, Message Types
Message classes are used to define numerous basic settings for messages. Message
classes differ from one another in respect of acknowledgment theory. In Alarm
Logging, the message classes "Error", "System, requires acknowledgment", and
"System, without acknowledgment" are preconfigured. Up to 16 message classes can
be defined. Messages with the same acknowledgment theory can be integrated in a
single message class.
Message types are subgroups of the message classes and can differ in the coloring of
the message states. Up to 16 message types can be created for each message class.
Message Blocks
A state change of a message is displayed in a message line during runtime. The information
to be displayed in the message line is defined beforehand when configuring the message
blocks:
System blocks enable the specification of information which is predefined and cannot
be freely used, such as date, time, duration, comment. The value of the message block
is displayed in the message line (e.g.: the time).
User text blocks make it possible to assign a message to up to ten different, freely
definable texts. The message line contains text you defined. The message text of a
user text block can also display a process value. You define the output format for it.
By means of process value blocks you can display the value of tags in the message
line. The format that is used during this process cannot be defined freely. Define the
tags related to the process value blocks.
Message Event, Message State
Message events are "Came In", "Went Out", and "Acknowledged". All message
events are stored in the message archive.
Message states are the possible states of a message: "Came In", "Went Out",
"Acknowledged".
Message Window
In runtime, the changes in message states are indicated in a Message Window. You can
configure the appearance and operating options of the Message Window in Graphics
Designer.
A Message Window contains all messages, in tabular form, which have yet to be displayed.
Each message to be displayed appears in its own line, the message line.
The contents of the Message Window can be influenced by a user-defined filter, e.g. sorting
according to message blocks.
Depending on the source of the messages displayed in the Message Window, a distinction is
made between five types of message windows.
Message lists are used for displaying currently pending messages.

Short-term archive lists serve to display messages which are stored in a message
archive. The display of messages is immediately updated when a new message is
received.
Long-term archive lists serve to display messages which are stored in a message
archive
All messages in the system which have been locked are displayed in the lock list.
Locked messages can be unlocked by a button in the toolbar.
The hitlist contains static information on the messages.
Message Frames
Message frames originate from either the process or from the process control monitoring
system. They are exchanged between the control system or the monitoring application and
Alarm Logging.
Message Tag
In the bit message procedure, the control system signals the occurrence of an event in the
process via the message tag. Several messages can be masked via one message tag.
Message Procedure
Alarm Logging supports multiple message procedures:
In the bit message procedure, the control system signals the occurrence of an event
via the message tag. The time stamp, date and time of the message is assigned by
Alarm Logging.
With chronologically correct messages, the control system transmits a telegram with
the message data when the event occurs. This is analyzed by Alarm Logging. The
time stamp, namely the date and time of the message, is assigned by the control
system.
If the procedure "Acknowledgment triggered messaging" (QTM) is enabled on an AS
S7-400, not every signal change is reported to the OS. According to the QTM
procedure, in the case of messages that occur very frequently and are caused by
wavering signalers, a new message about a signal change is sent from the AS only
after the positive signal change (incoming message) that was reported last was
acknowledged in the OS.
Analog alarms can be used to monitor the course of an analog tag for violation of the
upper and lower limit values.
Message Line
In a Message Window, each message is displayed in its own message line. The contents of
the message line are dependent on the message blocks to be displayed.
In the case of system message blocks, the value of the message block is displayed,
e.g. date and time.
In the case of process and user text blocks, the contents are displayed, e.g. the text
you defined.
Reports
There are three types of message reports available in Alarm Logging.
In the case of message sequence reports, all the state changes (Came In, Went Out,
Acknowledged) from all currently pending messages are output to a printer.
The online message report is used to print the messages from the alarm control, which
have been sorted chronologically, on a printer with an opened Process Message
Window by using the "Print" button.
In the case of archive reports, all changes in message states stored in an archive are
output to a printer.
Acknowledgment Theory
Acknowledgment theory is the way in which a message is to be displayed and processed
from the time it "Came In" to the time it "Went Out". The following acknowledgment
theories can be realized in Alarm Logging:
Single message without acknowledgment

Single message with incoming acknowledgment
Single message with dual-mode acknowledgment
Initial value message with single-mode acknowledgment
New-value message with single-mode acknowledgment
New-value message with dual-mode acknowledgment
Message without status "Went Out" without acknowledgment
Message without status "Went Out" with acknowledgment
Acknowledgment Tag
In the acknowledge tags, the "acknowledgment status" of a message is stored. A central
signaling device can thus be controlled using the acknowledgment tag.
Locking and Unlocking Messages
In order to reduce the number of message events, known, repeating messages can be locked
and unlocked again. A distinction is made between the active and passive locking/unlocking
of messages. For an active locking, the message source must support the locking/unlocking
of messages with confirmation and a valid date/time stamp. In addition, a general query of
the source must deliver the currently locked messages. If the message source fulfills these
requirements, the messages are locked/unlocked actively, otherwise the messages WinCC are
locked/unlocked passively by WinCC.
In the case of active locking, a disabling request is sent to the message source (for
example, AS). The message is disabled in WinCC only after the source replies the
message as locked. The unlocking of the messages is performed in the same way.
Only the messages that have been configured chronologically on the AS level are
locked/unlocked actively.
In the case of passive locking, the message is locked/unlocked in the alarm server of
WinCC. The message source is not included.
Status Tag
In the status tag, the "Came In / Went Out" status of the message type and an identifier for
messages to be acknowledged are stored.
Alarm Logging
Introduction
Alarm Logging is used to configure the messages and the message archive. Alarm Logging is
started with a double-click in WinCC Explorer.
Structure of Alarm Logging
Alarm Logging is organized into the Navigation, Data and Table Windows.
(1) Navigation Window

To configure messages, work through the folders in the root directory in sequence. Use the
pop-up menu to access the individual areas as well as their elements.
(2) Data Window
The Data Window displays the symbols of the objects available. Double-click on the object
to access the respective Alarm Logging setting. Use the pop-up menu to call in the object
properties. The content differs according to the object selected.
(3) Table Window
The Table Window contains a table with all the single messages generated and properties
configured. The individual fields can be edited by double-clicking on them with the left
mouse button.
Note:
In case of inconsistent configuration of single messages, the table window entries are
highlighted on a dark magenta background. An inconsistent configuration results if the
message class or message type of the single message does not exist in message configuration.
Principles of the Message System

Introduction
Messages inform the user of operating and error states in a process. They help recognize
critical situations at an early stage and prevent shutdowns.
Structure of a Message
Messages in runtime are displayed as lines in a table. Here, an individual message is
composed of information which can be displayed in the fields of the table. These individual
pieces of information are referred to as message blocks.
The message blocks are subdivided into three groups:
System blocks with system data, e.g. date, time, message number and status
Process value blocks with process values, e.g. current fill levels, temperatures or
speeds
User text block with explanatory texts, e.g. the message text with information on
location and cause of a fault
Whereas the contents of the system blocks are fixed, the contents of the process value blocks
and user text blocks can be modified by the user. Selections in system blocks affect only their
display; their reporting is not affected.
Configuration
Messages are configured in Alarm Logging. Several wizards provide support during
configuration:
The System Wizard provides support when defining the message system's basic
settings.
The Linking Wizard simplifies the assignment of process tags to messages.
A selection of single messages can be processed simultaneously.
The same text can be assigned to several user text block.
Graphics Designer is used to configure the Message Window, realized as ActiveX-Control, to

display messages in runtime. The options concerning the appearance and operation of the
Message Window can be defined freely.
Report Designer is used to configure the chronological printout of messages and logging of
message archives.
Displaying Messages in Runtime

In runtime, the events coming from the controls or process control system are detected by
Alarm Logging then analyzed, archived and displayed in a Message Window.
Configuring the Message System

Introduction
Alarm Logging is used to define when specific messages appear in the Message Window,
their content and when they are archived.
Basic Procedure
The configuration of the message system is divided into the following steps:
1. The system wizard is used to define basic message system settings.
2. Configure the message blocks in accordance with your requirements.
3. Configure the messages and message types.
4. Configure the single messages and group messages.
5. Set the type of data archiving.
6. Save the changes made in Alarm Logging after each configuration step.
Note:
Use the wizards and configuration dialogs available to create the messages completely.
How to Configure Message Classes

Introduction
Configure the following basic settings for message classes:
Name of message class

Assigned message types
Aknowledgement theory and associated status texts
Output of acoustic/optic signals
Prerequisite
The message classes have been added to the message system.
Procedure
Procedure
1
Select the "Message Classes" folder in the Navigation Window.
Select the message class to be configured from the Data Window. Select the
"Properties" command in the pop-up menu or double-click on the message class. The
Properties dialog of the selected message class opens.
When the "Configure Message Class..." dialog is open, click on the tab control on
which the properties of the message class should be displayed and edited.
Exit from the dialog by clicking on "OK".
How to Add Message Types to a Message Class

Introduction
Message types are configured in a message class to differentiate the message states by means
their color.
Prerequisite
The message class has been added to the message system.
Procedure
Procedure
1
2
Select the message class required in the Navigation Window.

Select the "Add/Remove Message Types..." command from the pop-up menu. The
"Add Message Type..." dialog opens.
Select the message types required from the list of message types available. Add these
message types to the list of selected message types by clicking on
To add all the message types available, click on

clicking "OK".
. Confirm the process by
1. Select the "Message Class" folder in the Navigation Window.
2. Select the message class required in the Data Window. Select the "Properties"
command from the pop-up menu. The "Configure Message Class..." dialog opens.
3. Click on the "Add" button.
The "Add Message Type..." dialog opens.
4. Select the message types required from the list of message types available. Add these
message types to the list of selected message types by clicking on
the message types available, click on
. To add all
. Confirm the process by clicking "OK".
How to Change Message Type Properties

Introduction
Message type properties are configured in the message type Properties dialog. You can
change the name of the message type and the display color of the messages for the "Came
In", "Acknowledged", and "Went Out" states.
Prerequisite
The message type has been added to the message class.
Procedure
1
2
Select the message class whose message type is to be changed from the Navigation
Window.
Select the message type required in the Data Window.
Select the "Properties" command from the pop-up menu. The "Type" dialog opens.
Change the properties of the message type in the dialog, e.g. the text color of the "Came
In" status. Exit the dialog by clicking on "OK".
1. Select the message class whose message type is to be changed from the Navigation
Window.
2. Select the "Properties" command from the pop-up menu. The "Configure Message
Classes" dialog opens.
3. Select the message type required in the dialog and click on "Properties". The "Type"
dialog opens.
4. Change the properties of the message type in the dialog, e.g. the text color of the
"Came In" status. Exit from the dialog by clicking on "OK".
How to Configure the Acknowledgment of a Message Class

Introduction
Acknowledging a message entails defining how a message is displayed and edited in runtime
between the states "Came In" to "Went Out".
Requirement
The "Configure Message Classes" dialog of the message class is open in Alarm
Logging.
Basic Procedure
Use the "Acknowledgment" tab to configure the message Acknowledgment theory of the
message class and the Acknowledgment of a message via a central signaling device.
Select between eight different states to acknowledge a message:
Message without acknowledgment

Message with "Came In" acknowledgment
Message with dual-mode acknowledgment
Initial value message with single-mode acknowledgment
New-value message with single-mode acknowledgment
New-value message with dual-mode acknowledgment
Message without Status "Went Out" with acknowledgment
Message without Status "Went Out" without acknowledgment
Acknowledgment Theory Options
Option
Description
Acknowledgment
Came In
Activate the check box for a single message with "Came In"
acknowledgment. Incoming messages of this message class must be
acknowledged. The message is retained until it is acknowledged.
Acknowledgment
Went Out
Activate the check box for a message with dual-mode Acknowledgment.

Outgoing messages of this message class must be acknowledged.
Flashing On
Activate the check box for a new value message with single or dual mode
acknowledgment. Messages of this message class flash when displayed in
the Message Window. In order that a message block of a message flashes in
runtime, flashing must be enabled in the properties of the related message
block.
...Only Initial
Value
Activate the check box for an initial value message with single-mode
Acknowledgment. Only the first message in this message class flashes in
the Message Window display. The "Flashing On" check box must be
activated beforehand.
Message Without Activate the check box for a message without the "Went Out" status with or
Status "Went Out" without acknowledgment. When this option is activated, the messages do
not have the "Went Out" status. If the message only recognizes the "Came
In" status, the message is not entered in the Message Window and is only
archived.
Comments
Assigned To
Unique User
If you activate the check box, the comments in the message window are
assigned to the logged-in user. The user is entered in the "User Name"
system block. If no comment has been entered to date, any user can enter
the first comment. After the first comment has been set, all the other users
have read only access to the comment.
Comments always
in the message list
of the incoming
message
If you activate the check box, the user text blocks with dynamic parts
"@100%s@", "@101%s@", "@102%s@" and "@103%s@" will always
display the comment of the incoming message. The display is then
independent of the message status in the message list.
When certain options have been selected, other options may no longer be available for
selection. To select one of the unavailable options, a selection previously made must be
reverted.
Note:
If a message type does not need to be acknowledged and does not possess the state "Went
Out", it does not appear in the Message Window. The message is only archived. If such a
message is used inside a group message, the occurring of the message does not trigger the
group message.
Acknowledging a Central Signaling Device
Option
Description
Separate Ack. Key
Central signaling devices which are triggered when a message arrives are
acknowledged by the user by means of a separate acknowledgment button
in the toolbar or key on the keyboard. The acknowledgment button must
be configured in the Message Window. The separate acknowledgment key
is always active even if the "By Means Of Single Ack." option has been
selected.
By Means of
Single Ack.
Central signaling devices, triggered when a message comes in, are

acknowledged by acknowledging the message that triggered them.
Tag
The central signaling device is controlled by the tag defined.

Calls in the "Select Tag" dialog to select a tag to serve as the
acknowledgment tag.
How to Configure the Status Texts of a Message Class
Introduction
he status texts of a message are displayed in the message line of system blocks "Status" and
"Acknowledgment Status".
Prerequisite
You have opened the dialog "Configure Message Classes" of the message class in
Alarm Logging.
Display in Message Window

The display of status texts depends on the selected type of the message window:
Window
Type
System Block
Display of status texts from field
Message
List
Status
"Came In" or "Came In and Went Out"
Message
List
Acknowledgment
Status
"Acknowledged"
Archive
List
Status
"Came In", "Acknowledged" or "Went Out"
Archive
List
Acknowledgment
Status
No text is displayed.
Lock List Status
No text configurable. For a locked message, the

text "Lock" is displayed, the lock is nonconfigurable.
Lock List Acknowledgment

Status
No text configurable. No text is displayed.
Note:
The display of status texts "Acknowledgment System" for system-acknowledged messages
and "Ack-Reset" for acknowledged messages using the emergency acknowledgment are
generated by the system.
Configuration of Status Texts
On the "Status Texts" tab, you configure the texts for the individual message states.
Option
Description
Came In
Text for "Came In" messages during change to operating status to be notified
Went Out
Text for "Went Out" messages during change to operating status to be notified
Acknowledged
Text for acknowledged messages
Came In and
Went Out
Text for "Came In" and "Went Out" message
Note:
Status texts are displayed in the message line only up to the length to which they were
configured in the system block properties. A system block should therefore be long enough to
display the longest status text.
Using Single Messages

Introduction
With single messages, every event is assigned a message. Several single messages can be
grouped to form a group message. A single message consists of the defined message blocks.
Configuring Single Messages
Single messages are processed in the Table Window of Alarm Logging:
Create and copy single messages

Delete single message
Define and edit single message parameters
Single Message Parameters

Introduction
In the "Single Message" dialog on the "Parameter" tab, you define the following messages:
Single message parameters, e.g. the relation to a message class and message type
Parameters for the connections to various tags, e.g. the message tag
Opening the "Single Message" Dialog

You open the properties dialog of a single message in the pop-up menu of the selected single
message by using the "Properties" command.
Click once on
Click once on
to open the dialog to select the tags.

to reset the tag definition and the bit used in it.
Single Message Parameters

You can set the following parameters for a single message:
Parameter
Description
Number
Number of the single message. The number can only be set in the Table
Window.
Class
Message class of the single message.
Type
Message type of the single message.
Group
When the single message is assigned to a user-defined group message,

you can select a configured group message from the selection list.
Priority
Determines the priority of the message. You can sort the display of
messages according to their priority. The value range is "0 - 16".
In WinCC it is not specified which value corresponds to the highest
priority. In the environment of PCS7, the value 16 corresponds to the
highest priority.
is single
The message must be acknowledged individually. It cannot be
acknowledgment only acknowledged with a group acknowledgment key.
Controls the central
signaling device
A central signaling device is triggered for incoming messages.
Will be archived
The message is saved in the archive.
is created on a
negative edge
During the bit message procedure you can determine whether the
message will be created during positive or negative signal edge. With
all other message procedures, the message is always created with the
positive signal edge.
For messages with a negative edge, the message tag must be configured
with the start value "1".
Triggers an action
The message triggers the standard function GMsgFunction which can

be modified using the "Global Script" editor. Use the Global Script
function browser to locate the function under "Standard
functions/alarm".
AS number
Number of the AS (subordinate control - PLC) on which the message is

triggered.
The field is only displayed if the block "AS/CPU Number" is available
in the system message block.
The value that is configured here is displayed in runtime in the message
block of the single message and does not have any function in the
communication with the AS.
CPU number
Number of the CPU in which the message is triggered.

The field is only displayed if the block "AS/CPU Number" is available
in the system message block.
The value that is configured here is displayed in runtime in the message
block of the single message and does not have any function in the
communication with the AS or the CPU.
Message tag
The message tag contains the bit with which the currently selected
message is to be triggered.
Message bit
Number of the bit within the message tag with which the currently
selected message is to be triggered.
Acknowledgment tag
Define the tag which is to be used as the acknowledgment tag.
Acknowledgment bit
Number of the bit within the acknowledgment tag which is used to

acknowledge the message.
Status tag
Define the tag in which the states of the single message are to be stored
("Came In / Went Out and acknowledgment status).
Status bit
Number of bit within the status tag indicating the message state. The bit
for obligatory acknowledgment is determined automatically.
Format DLL
If the message tag is a raw data tag, you must select the corresponding
compilation program here.
DLL parameters
Define the interface specific DLL- (Format DLL) message parameters.

This setting is only required if this message belongs to an own Format
DLL interfaced via ODK.
Parameter Input to a Single Message in the Table Window

Various fields of the table window can be used to enter parameters in different ways. A
double-click is assigned the following functions:
Opening dialogs on single messages to select a tag, for example.

Selecting a parameter via an option field.
Entering a parameter directly.
How to Create a Single Message

Introduction
A single message is created in the Table Window of the Alarm Logging by appending a new
line or a copyied single message.
Prerequisite
The "Alarm Logging" editor is open.
Creating a New Single Message

Procedure
1
Access the Table Window and click on the "Append New Line" command in the pop-up
menu.
A line is appended to the end of the table. This line contains the content of the new
message. If necessary, change the properties of the new single message.
Creating a Copied Single Message

Procedure
1
Select a field of the single message to be copied from the Table Window.
2
Select the "Copy Line" command from the pop-up menu.
Select the "Append Copied Line" command from the pop-up menu.
3
4
A line is appended to the end of the table. This line contains the content of the copied
message. If necessary, change the properties of the copied single message.
How to Delete a Single Message

Introduction
A single message is deleted in the Table Window of the Alarm Logging.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Procedure
1
Select a field of the single message to be deleted from the Table Window.
2
Select the "Delete Line" command from the pop-up menu.
The single message is deleted and removed from the table.
Message Tag of a Single Message

Introduction
The message is triggered by means of the message tag. The structure of message tags is not
specifically defined.
The following options are available for configuring message tags:
Configure an individual message tag for each single message.

Trigger multiple single messages via one message tag. The differentiation of the
single messages occurs via the message bit.
Procedure for Configuration

Using the "Properties" command in the pop-up menu of the single message selected. Define
the message tag in the "Single Message" dialog on the "Parameter" tab control:
Click on
to open the dialog for the tag selected to be used as the message tag.
Click on
to reset the tag definition of the message tag and message bit.
Status Tag of a Single Message

Introduction
A single message always contains two decisive message states:
The "Came In / Went Out" status shows if the message came in or went out.
The acknowledgment status shows if the message requires acknowledgement and has
not been acknowledged yet.
Both states of the single message are stored in a status tag. Depending on the data type of the
tag, up to 16 single messages can be recorded in a status tag. Every single message occupies
2 bits in the status tag.
Acknowledgment Bit
The acknowledgment bit in the status tag changes to Status "1" as soon as a single message
requiring acknowledgement is received and has not yet been acknowledged. The
acknowledgement bit switches to Status "0" as soon as a single message requiring
acknowledgement is acknowledged.
Position of the Bits in "Came In / Went Out" Status and in Acknowledge Status
The position of the bit with the "Came In / Went Out" status in the status tag is marked by the
status bit. The position of the "Acknowledgement Bit" is dependent on the data type of the
status tag.
The distance to the bit containing the "Came In / Went Out" status is:
4 bits with the "8 Bit unsigned" tag,

8 bits with the "16 Bit unsigned" tag,
16 bits with the "32 Bit unsigned" tag.
Status Tag of Data Type "32 Bit unsigned"

If the status tag is of data type "32 Bit unsigned" and the status bit = 9,
bit no. 9 characterizes the status tag, the "Came In / Went Out" status of the single
message.
bit no. 25 characterizes the status tag, whether this single message requires
acknowledgement.
The bits "0-15" correspond with "16-31" accordingly in a "32 bit" status tag.

message.
bit no. 11 characterizes the status tag , whether this single message requires
acknowledgement.

message.
bit no. 7 characterizes the status tag , whether this single message requires
acknowledgement.
Configuring the Status Tag

the status tag in the "Single Message" dialog on the "Parameter" tab control:
Click on
to open the dialog for the tag selected to be used as the status tag.
Click on
to reset the definition of the status tag and status bit.
Acknowledgement Tag of a Single Message

Introduction
In single messages, one acknowledgement tag bit is used to trigger the acknowledgement and
display the status. The following applies:
If the acknowledgement bit of a single message has the value "1", the single message
has been acknowledged.
If the acknowledgement bit of a single message has the value "0", the single message
has not been acknowledged.
This acknowledgement bit is set when a single message is acknowledged during runtime.
The structure of acknowledgement tags is not specifically defined. The following options are
available for configuring message tags:
Note:
Configure an individual acknowledgement tag for each single message.

Combine several single messages in one acknowledgment tag. The differentiation of
the single messages then takes place via the acknowledgement bit.
For acknowledgement of the single message through the WinCC Alarm Control, the
acknowledgement bit that is assigned to the single message is set. The acknowledgement bit
is reset by an action, e.g. a button in the WinCC process screen, or via a program in the AS.
Configuring Acknowledgment Tags

the acknowledgement tag in the "Single Message" dialog on the "Parameter" tab control:
Click on
to open the dialog for the tag selected to be used as the acknowledgment tag.
Click on
to reset the tag definition of the acknowledgment tag and the acknowledge bit.
How to Define the Tags of a Single Message

Introduction
The process values are represented by tags. The process value blocks configured for the
single message must be linked to the associated WinCC tags.
Prerequisite
The single messages have already been created.

At least one process value block has been added to the message system.
Procedure
Procedure
1
2
Using the "Properties" command in the pop-up menu of the single message selected.
The "Single Message" dialog opens.
Select the "Tag/Action" tab control.
3
Click on
for the configured process value block. Select the process tag to which the
process value block should be linked in the Tag Selection dialog which opens. Click on
"OK".
4
Click on
to reset the process tag defined.
How to Link Tags and Messages Using the Linking Wizard

Introduction
The linking wizard provides support for linking the message tags and acknowledgement tags
of messages with the tags of the WinCC Explorer. The tag connections generated by the
wizard can be changed later in the Table Window.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Procedure
1
Open the "File" menu, select the "System Wizard" command and select "Linking
Wizard". Click on the "OK" button. Alternatively, start the linking wizard via the
"Messages" menu.
2
Select a message tag from the "Linking Tags: Message Tag" dialog using the
button. Enter the numbers of the messages to which you would like to link the selected
message tag.
Select an acknowledgement tag from the "Linking Tags: Acknowledgment Tag" dialog
using the
button. Enter the numbers of the messages to which you would like to
link the selected acknowledgement tag.
Click on the "Finish" button to exit from the wizard. The tags selected are linked to the
corresponding messages.
How to Define the Message Text of a Single Message

Introduction
The message text of a message can be defined to contain information on the cause of a fault
or localization of a fault, for example.
Settings for Configuring Message Texts
Open the "Single Message" dialog and select the "Texts" tab control to define the
configurable texts for the single message.
The following settings can be defined on the "Texts" tab control:
Option
Description
Info Text
Here you can enter an information text with up to 255 characters. Info texts
cannot be changed in runtime.
Enter a text with up to 255 characters.
Blocks 1 to 10 represent the corresponding user text blocks.
Blocks 1 to 10
In the user text block, the following format instructions can be used to
display the contents of a field of the message's Comment dialog:
@100%s@ = Computer Name (max. 16 characters)
@101%s@ = Application Name (max. 32 characters)
@102%s@ = User Name (max. 16 characters)
@103%s@ = Comment (max. 255 characters) of the message in the longterm archive list. This requires a comment entered in the message.
The format instructions are only displayed in the user text block of the shortterm and long-term archive lists.
Click on the button to open the "Insert Process Value" dialog. Enter a process
value in the user text block here.
The process value entered is identified in the user text by the format
instruction @.....@.
Prerequisites
You have already created single messages.
Procedure
Procedure
1
Select the required single message in the Table Window.
2 Select the "Properties" command from the pop-up menu. The "Single Message" dialog opens.
3
Define the required settings in the "Texts" tab control.
1. Access the Table Window, select the single message and double-click on the field
where you want to insert or modify text. Edit the user text blocks directly in the table
field. The "Info Text" dialog opens in the case of "Info Text".
2. In the "Info Text" dialog, you enter additional information text for a message, up to
255 characters. An info text describes, for example, why a message can be received.
You can copy or insert the text in the dialog using the pop-up menu and standard
editing functions. Info texts cannot be changed in runtime.
How to Insert Process Values in User Text Blocks

Introduction
A process value can be inserted in a user text block. The maximum length of a user text
block, 255 characters, must not be exceeded.
Settings for Configuring Process Values
Use the "Insert Process Value" dialog to assign the format of the process value in the user text
block.
The following settings can be made:
Button
Description
User text block
Indicates the user text block in which a process value is to be inserted.
Length
Indicates the defined text length of the user text block.
Text
Mirrors the look of the user text.
Process value
block
Set the process value here that corresponds to the value to be inserted.
Type
Sets the format type of the process value that will be inserted.
The following are available for selection:

- Text
- Fixed point number (decimal, octal, hexadecimal)
- Floating point number
Position
Sets the position of the format statement within the text. Specifying
"Position: 10" causes the process value to be inserted after the tenth character
in the user text.
Number of
digits
Defines the number of characters that are reserved for the process value
within the user text.
Precision
Defines the number of characters of the process value to be inserted in the

user text.
Pad with 0
If this function is active, floating-point numbers are filled to the number of

characters specified in the "Precision" text field.
Aligned left
If the number of digits in the process value to be inserted is smaller than the
number of digits reserved, this function is used to specify whether the process
value is aligned right or left when it is inserted in the user text.
Format
specifications
Indicates the format instruction which has been defined.
Example
Displays examples of how the specifications of number of digits, precision,

align left, and padding affect the different types of process values.
Requirement

At least one process value block has been added to the message system.
Procedure
Procedure
1
Select the single message required in the Table Window.
2
Select the "Properties" command from the pop-up menu. The "Single Message" dialog
opens.
3
In the case of a user text block, click on the "Texts" tab

Value" dialog opens.
. The "Insert Process
4
Define the required settings.
How to Link a Picture to a Single Message

Introduction
A system graphic, representing part of the process, in which the message occurred can be
displayed in respect of a single message in runtime. To do this, assign the name of the system
graphic to a picture function which will be triggered in the Message Window:
by a double-click on a message,
by the "Loop in Alarm" button in the toolbar.
Note:
The standard WinCC "OpenPicture" function is used for the picture function. Any function
can be specified and define an additional file as the transfer parameter.
Consider the following if a different function is to be used:
- use a standard function which accepts a transfer parameter of the type char*, e.g.: void
MyFunction(char* NameOwnData).
- only use standard functions whose return parameters are of types "unsigned char", "short
int", "long int", "float", "double", "bool" or "void".
Prerequisite

A system graphic has been configured in Graphics Designer.
Procedure
Procedure
1
2
Using the "Properties" command in the pop-up menu of the single message selected.
The "Single Message" dialog opens.
Select the "Tag/Action" tab control.
3
Enter the name of the picture in the "Picture Name/Call Parameter" text field or click
on
. Select the picture from the project directory. Click on
name definition.
4
to reset the picture
If another picture function is used, click on the

in the "Function Name" field. Select
your function in the function browser which appears.
Confirm the input by clicking "OK".
1. Double-click on the "Loop in Alarm" field in the selected message in the Table
Window. The "Loop in Alarm" dialog opens.
2. Enter the name of the picture in the "Picture Name/Call Parameter" text field or click
on
. Select the required picture from the project directory. Click on
the picture name definition. Click on "OK".
to reset
3. If another picture function is used, click on the

in the "Function Name" field.
Select your function in the function browser which appears.
4. Confirm the input by clicking "OK".
How to Add WinCC System Messages

Introduction
The installation directory of WinCC contains the "LTMDaten.CSV" file. The file contains
special system messages which are triggered during runtime by various WinCC components.
Use the "WinCC System Messages" menu command to integrate the system messages in
your message system.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Procedure
1
2
Open the "Tools" menu and select the "WinCC System Messages..." command. The
"WinCC System Messages" dialog appears.
In the dialog, select the parameters for generating the messages.
3
Click on the "Create" button to start generating the system messages according to the
options selected. Exit the dialog by clicking on "Close".
Using Analog Alarm

Introduction
The analog alarm allows you to set any number of limit values for a tag. A message is
generated in runtime if one of the limit values is exceeded.
Analog Alarm is realized in WinCC as an add-in and must be integrated in the message
system. The "Analog Alarm" folder is then registered in the message system's Navigation
Window.
Configuring Analog Alarm

1. Integration of the analog alarm
2. Setting the tag to be monitored
3. Defining a limit value to be monitored
Note:
Changes in the dialogs of the analog alarm are accepted in the database tables immediately
after exiting the dialog.
If the configuration takes place online, the message system must be saved in order to supply
the project with the modified values during runtime.
Limit Value Monitoring Messages

Specifying Message Numbers
In the "Properties" dialog for tags limit value, you may specify the number of a message to
be generated during an analog alarm violation. This affects the configuration of a message as
follows:
If you enter the number of a message which does not yet exist, this message is
automatically created.
If you enter the number of an existing message, several properties of that message
will be changed. Settings for message tags as well as linkages for process value
blocks 1 - 3 will be deleted.
Note:
When configuring the limit value monitoring, the automatically generated messages must not
be additionally created via the Table Window of the Alarm Logging. After Alarm Logging is
restarted, the messages are visible and can be modified in the Table Window.
The values of the limit value, hysteresis, and trigger value are stored in process value blocks
1 to 3. The process value blocks 4 to 10 may not be used for a limit value monitoring
message.
How to Define the Tags to be Monitored

Tag Parameters
The following properties can be set for the tags to be monitored:
Parameter
Description
Number of limit This field displays the number limit values to be monitored.
values
A message for
all limit values
If this option is activated, the same message is always displayed in runtime if

one of the configured limit values is violated.
Message
number
Enter the number of the message to be generated in runtime in the event of a

limit value violation.
Here, you set the delay time that has to pass between the limit value violation
and the generation of the message. The message will only be triggered if the
limit value has been violated for the entire delay time.
Delay time
The delay time can be set from 250 to 10000 ms. If you wish no delay time,
enter the value "0".
Prerequisite

Analog Alarm is integrated in the message system.
Procedure
Procedure
1
Select the "Analog Alarm" folder in the Navigation Window.
2
Select the "New..." command in the pop-up menu. The "Properties" dialog opens.
3
Enter the name of the tag in the "Tag to be monitored" input field or click on
Select the tag from the dialog which then opens:
4
5
Define the other tag properties.

Click on "OK" to save the settings.
How to Change the Properties of a Tag to be Monitored

Tag Parameters
The following properties can be modified for the tags to be monitored:
Parameter
Description
A message for
all limit values
If this option is activated, the same message is always displayed in runtime if

one of the configured limit values is violated.
Message
Number
Enter the number of the message to be generated in runtime in the event of a

limit value violation.
Set the delay time between the limit value violation and the generation of the
message. The message will only be triggered if the limit value has been
violated for the entire delay time.
Delay time
The delay time can be set from 250 to 10000 ms. If you wish no delay time,
enter the value "0".

Prerequisite

Analog Alarm is integrated in the message system.
The analog alarm has been configured for the tag to be monitored.
Procedure
Procedure
1
Select the tag whose properties are to be changed either from the "Analog Alarm"
folder in the Navigation Window or from the Data Window.
2
3
Select the "Properties" command from the pop-up menu. The "Properties" dialog opens.
Change the properties of tag.
4
Click on "OK" to save the settings.
How to Define Limit Values to be Monitored

Introduction
You can define any number of limit values to be monitored for a tag. To do this, call in the
dialog several times to define the limit values.
Limit Value Parameters
You can set the following properties for the limit values to be monitored:
Parameter
Description
High limit
A message is generated when the tag value exceeds the upper limit.
Low limit
A message is generated when the tag value falls below the lower limit value.
The input field contains either the limit value to be monitored or the defined
tag. Click the "Tag" button to open the tag selection dialog.
Limit value or
tag
Hysteresis
Message
When exiting the tag selection dialog via "OK", the "Indirect" option will be
activated. Do not use a tag whose name is comprised solely of digits to define
indirect limit values. The tag name must start with a letter. In case of an
indirect limit value specification, the value of the tag to be monitored is
stored in process value block 3 when the message is triggered.
Messages, for which a hysteresis has been defined, are not triggered
immediately upon reaching their limit value but after the actual tag value has
exceeded or fallen below the limit value by the hysteresis value.
The hysteresis can be entered as either an absolute value or a percentage
deviation from the limit value. Depending on the selected setting, the
hysteresis will become effective while a message is triggered or taken back.
Enter the number of the message to be generated in runtime if a limit value
violation occurs.
This field can only be edited if you did not select "A message for all limit
values" in the "Properties of Tags" dialog.
Suppress
message
Use this option to suppress the messages of tags whose Quality Code does
not comply with the status "GOOD". In this case, a possible value change of
the tag will not be checked for its violation of the limit value.
Prerequisites

The limit value monitoring is integrated into the message system.
The limit value monitoring has been configured for the tag to be monitored.
Procedure
Procedure
1
Select the tag to be monitored in the "Limit Value Monitoring" dialog in the Navigation
Window or in the Data Window.
2
3
Select the "New..." command in the pop-up menu. The "Properties" dialog opens.
Define the properties of the limit value.
4
Click "OK" to save the settings.
How to Delete Analog Alarm Objects

Introduction
It is possible to delete tags being monitored and limit values.
Deleting Tags Being Monitored
Procedure
1
Select the tag being monitored which is to be deleted either from the "Analog Alarm"
folder in the Navigation Window or from the Data Window.
2
Select the "Delete" command from the pop-up menu. The tag and the limit values
configured are deleted. The message assigned to it is retained in the message system.
Deleting Limit Values
Procedure
1
Select the limit value in the Data Window of the tag which is monitoring the analog
alarm.
2
Select the "Delete" command from the pop-up menu. The limit value configured is
deleted. The message assigned to it is retained in the message system.
Examples for Configuring a Limit Value

Introduction
The following examples illustrate how the configuration of limit values affects the behavior
of the analog alarm.
Example 1
Message no. 4 is triggered (Come In) when the tag being monitored has exceeded the value
220.
Message no. 4 is reset when the tag being monitored drops below the value 200.
Example 2
Message no. 4 is triggered (Come In) when the tag being monitored has exceeded the value
in the "Limit Value" tag.
Message no. 4 is reset when the tag being monitored has dropped below the value of the
"Limit Value" tag by 10%.
Message Archiving
Contents
The Archive Management feature in WinCC gives you the opportunity to archive messages
in order to create documentation for specific operational and fault statuses. To ensure that
data is regularly saved you should configure regular backups.
This chapter shows you
how to configure message archiving

how to configure backups in order to save data
how to configure the output from message archive data in runtime
Message Archiving in WinCC

Introduction
The Archive Management feature in WinCC gives you the opportunity to archive process
values and messages in order to create documentation for specific operational and fault
statuses. Microsoft SQL Server is used for archiving.
Messages configured in Alarm Logging are output in runtime when the associated event
occurs, for example a fault or an above limit value. Messages are archived if events known as
message events occur, for example:
when the message occurs
when the status of the message changes (e.g. from "Message Came In" to "Confirm
Message")
You can save the message events in an archive database and archive them as a hard copy
message report. Messages archived in the database can be output in runtime, for instance in a
message window.
Archived Message Data
All the data associated with a message, including the configuration data, is saved in the
message archive. You can therefore read out all the properties of a message from the
archives, including such matters as its message type, time stamp and texts. A subsequent
change to the configuration data of a message causes a new archive to be created with the
new configuration data. This ensures that the change has no effect on messages that were
archived before the change was made.
Note:
The time stamp on archived messages is always in standard UTC format (Coordinated
Universal Time).
Since messages are configured on a language-dependent basis, archives contain a table with
the configuration data for each designed language.
Estimated Volume Requirements

The following table shows the number of messages that WinCC can process. The actual
number depends on the server used. The information in the table refers to the following
server configuration:
Intel Pentium III with 1.4 GHz

512 MB RAM
40 GB hard disk
Maximum of 16 clients
Server
Special archive server
Sustained message load (per

second)
10 messages
100 messages
Message flow (per 10

seconds)
2,000 messages
15,000 messages
Note:
The values for message flow apply only to archiving. For further processing in Alarm
Logging, additional time must be planned: Five minutes must elapse before a new message
overload can be created.
Configuring Message Archiving

Introduction
For archiving messages, WinCC uses cyclic archives of a configurable size, and you can
configure them with or without backup.
Storing Archive Files
Archive files are always stored so that they are local to the computer in the associated
project.
Note:
It is not currently possible to use a central archive server in a PCS7 environment because
messages and their tag connections cannot be disconnected on different computers.
Properties of Message Archives
A WinCC message archive consists of multiple individual segments. You can configure both
the size of the message archive and the size of the individual segments in WinCC:
The size of the message archive or individual segments, e.g.: The message archive is
100 MB at 5 MB per individual segment.
The archiving period of the message archive or the individual segments, e.g.: The
message archive archives all messages which occur within one week, each individual
segment archives the messages which occur within one day. The configuration of the
archiving period is called archive partitioning.
You can always configure both conditions at the same time. If either of the two criteria is
exceeded, the following happens:
1. Criteria for message archive (DB) is exceeded: The oldest messages (i.e. the oldest
individual segment) are deleted.
2. Criteria for individual segment is exceeded: A new individual segment (ES) is
created.
A new individual segment is also created when you configure message data online.
Note:
When starting runtime, the system tests whether the configured size of the individual has
been calculated to a sufficient size. If the configured size is too small, the system
automatically adapts to the minimum size.
Backing Up Archived Messages
The data from the message archives can be stored in a backup.
Configuring Messages for Archiving

Introduction
You can purposely select from among your configured messages those you wish to archive.
Note:
A newly created message in WinCC is archived by default. In principle, therefore, you need
only carry out the procedure described below for messages that have had their archiving
status modified.
Prerequisite
You have configured the message system. For information on configuring the message
system, please refer to the online Help on Alarm Logging.
Procedure
Procedure
1
Open Alarm Logging.
From the message list in Alarm Logging, select the message that you wish to archive.
3
4
From the pop-up menu select the command "Properties".

In the Properties dialog for the message concerned enable the checkbox headed "This
message will be archived":
Click on OK to confirm your input.
How to Configure the Message Archive

Introduction
You configure the message archive in Alarm Logging.
Note:
Make sure the archive size does not exceed the free memory space available. The archive
manager does not check the selected settings for plausibility. A high number of linked
database segments can lead to longer waiting periods in the system when starting and ending
runtime.
Procedure
Procedure
1 Open Alarm Logging and select the entry "Archive Configuration" in the Alarm Logging
navigation window.
Select the "Message Archive" entry and then select the "Properties" command from the pop2 up menu.
The "Alarm Logging" dialog appears.
Define the following settings for the archive:

3
Time period of all segments and its maximum size. These values define the size of the
archive database. If one of the criteria is exceeded, a new segment is started and the
oldest segment is deleted.
The time period in which messages are to be archived in an individual segment and its
maximum size. If one these criteria is violated, a new individual segment is started.
When the criterion for "Time period of all segments" is exceeded, the oldest
individual segment is also deleted.
4 In the field "Time of the segment change", enter the start date and the start time for the first
segment change.
When a new individual segment begins, the configuration of "Time of the segment change" is
taken into account.
5 Click OK to confirm your entry.
Note:
If you modify the archiving size (time range) during Runtime, such modification will take
effect only upon the next segment change.
Example
In the picture displayed above, the segment will change for the first time on 17 January at
23:59. The next time-related segment change occurs at the configured time in the cycle
defined in "Time period covered by a single segment". In case of the above mentioned cycle
setting "1 day" a change occurs daily at 23:59. If a cycle of "1 month" has been defined, the
segment change will occur on the 17th day of the following month at 23:59.
The segment is changed even if the configured size ("Max. size of all segments") is exceeded
after starting runtime. In this case, the oldest individual segment is also deleted.
Caution
After selecting the "Reset" command in the Archive Configuration pop-up menu, the runtime
data are deleted from the archives.
How to Configure an Archive Backup

Principle
Create regular backups of your archive data in order to ensure that the documentation for
your process is free from gaps.
Note:
The backup normally begins a quarter of an hour after the first time-related segment change.
If both the start of backup and start of segment should be synchronous with the start of
Runtime, define the start time for the segment change prior to the start of Runtime.
Procedure
Procedure
1
Open Alarm Logging in WinCC Explorer.
In the Alarm Logging navigation window, select the "Archive Configuration" entry. In the
data window, mark the "Message Archive" entry and select the "Properties" command
from the pop-up menu. The "Alarm Logging" dialog appears.
Switch over to the "Backup Configuration" tab.
Activate the "Signing off activated" check box if the swapped archived data are supposed
to receive a signature. Upon reconnection with WinCC, the signature allows the system to
recognize if any modifications have been made to the archive backup file after its swapout.
Activate the "Activate Backup" check box if the archived data is supposed to be backed
up. In addition, activate the "Backup to both paths" check box if the archived data are
supposed to be saved in both directories "Destination path" and "Alternative destination
path".
Enter the destination path in which the backup files should be stored. Network paths are
also valid as destination paths. The "Alternative destination path" is used when for
instance:
The storage space on a backup medium is full.

The original destination path is not available, e.g. due to a network failure.
If the corresponding system messages have been configured, the messages are issued
when a destination path is not available.
7
Click on OK to confirm your input.
Results
The archive backup is stored in the specified destination path.

Structure of the Archive Backup File
An archive backup consists of two files, with the extensions LDF and MDF. In order to
transfer an archive backup, e.g. to another computer, copy the corresponding LDF and MDF
files. The file name is composed as follows:
"<ComputerName>_<ProjectName>_<Type>_<Period_from>_<Period_to>". The type
identification of the message archive is "ALG". The time is specified in the format
yyyymmddhhmm, e.g. 200212021118, which signifies 2 December 2002 at 11:18 a.m.
Underlines ("_") in the project name are displayed as "#".
Signing Off of Archive Backup Files
Upon activated signing off and activated backup, each archive backup file will be signed off
upon swapping out. It may thus be determined upon reconnection of the file with WinCC
whether or not the file had been changed after swapping.
In order to verify the data, the "Signing off activated" check box must be activated.
If signing-off of archives is implemented, the maximum size of a single segment must not
exceed 200 MByte.
How to Connect an Archive Backup

Introduction
In order to access data in an archive backup during Runtime, link the associated database
files to the project. You may connect to the archive using the Alarm Logging Editor yourself,
or you may have the connection established automatically. The archived messages are
displayed in Runtime in a message display.
Requirement
The corresponding LFD file and MDF file of the archive backup are located in a local
directory on the configuration computer, e.g. hard disk, MOD, or CD. The project is loaded
on the configuration computer and is located in Runtime.
Note
The messages are displayed in Runtime only if the time window in the message display has
been configured accordingly. Example: You have configured the time window such that only
message of the past 24 hours are displayed. If you link to an archive backup which stores
messages older than 24 hours, these messages are not included in the message display.
Linking to the Archive Using the Alarm Logging Editor
Procedure
1
In the navigation window of Alarm Logging, select the "Archive Configuration" entry.
Use the right mouse button to click "Message Archive" in the data window and select
"Link Archive" from the pop-up menu.
Select the desired data bank file and click on "Open". After selecting the file, the
message archive is linked to the project.
If signing off is activated and you link a modified or unsigned archive backup file to the
project, you must acknowledge the link to these files or the archive backup files are not
linked. A WinCC System Message is generated and an entry is added to the Windows event
display under "Application".
Linking to the Archive Automatically
Procedure
1
Insert the archive backup files to the directory "Project name\CommonArchiving".
In Runtime, the message archive is automatically linked to the project.
If signing off has been activated, modified signed-off archive backup files are not
automatically linked. A WinCC System Message is generated and an entry is added to the
Windows event display under "Application".
How to Disconnect an Archive Backup

Introduction
If you no longer wish to access the data in an archive backup during Runtime, you disconnect
the associated data bank files from the project.
Prerequisite
Archive backup files are connected. The project is loaded on the configuration computer and
is located in Runtime.
Procedure
Procedure
1
In the navigation window of Alarm Logging, select the "Archive Configuration" entry.
Use the right mouse button to click "Message Archive" in the data window and select
"Disconnect from archive" from the pop-up menu.
Select the desired archive file and click OK.

The link to the archive file is disconnected. Access is no longer possible to the
archived messages in runtime.
Automatically linked archives must be removed from the "Project name\CommonArchiving"

directory by you or by using a script in VBS object "AlarmLogs".
Displaying messages in Runtime

Contents
"WinCC Alarm Control" is used as a message view for displaying message events. By using
Alarm Control, you achieve a high degree of flexibility while you are configuring, since the
message view, message line and the message blocks you want to have displayed are all
configured in Graphics Designer.
For the display in Runtime, Alarm Logging data are used in respect of the messages that have
to be displayed.
How to Configure the Message System

Introduction
After you have created a message system in Alarm Logging, you may configure the message
system according to your requirements.
The following settings were configured for the Alarm Control example:
the number of displayable characters in the user text block "Message Text"
the acknowledgment theory for message class "Error"
the color coding of message states for message types "Alarm" and "Caution"
Prerequisite
Procedure
Procedure
In the pop-up menu of user text block "Message Text", select the command "Properties"
and change the length of the message block.
In the pop-up menu of message class "Error", select the command "Properties" and
activate option box "Acknowledgment came in" in the "Acknowledgment" tab control.
In the pop-up menu of message type "Alarm" or "Caution", select the command
"Properties" and select the color for text and background for message states.
Save settings in Alarm Logging.
Operation of Alarm Control in Runtime

Introduction
The message window in Runtime is operated using the toolbar buttons. If you do not wish to
operate the message window using the toolbar, you have various functions available in the
"Global Script" editor within the "Standard functions/alarm" group.
Message List
Displays the currently pending messages.
"Short-term archive list"
Displays the archived messages in the short-term archive list
"Long-term archive list"
Displays the archived messages in the long-term archive list
"Lock list"
Displays all locked messages within the system
"Hitlist"
Displays message blocks and statistical information which you configured on
the "Hitlist" tab of Alarm Control.
Acknowledgment Central Signaling Devices

Acknowledges an optical or acoustic sensor.
Single Acknowledgment
Acknowledges a selected single message.
"Group Acknowledgment"
Acknowledges all pending, visible and acknowledgment-requiring messages in
the message window, provided they do not require single acknowledgment.
"AutoScroll"
If "AutoScroll" is activated, the most recent message is selected in the message
window. The visible area of the message window is moved if necessary.
If "AutoScroll" is not activated, a new incoming message will not be selected.
The visible area of the message window will not be changed.
A targeted selection of message lines is only possible if "AutoScroll" is not
activated.
"Selection dialog"
Specifies the selection criteria for the messages to be displayed in the message
window. The messages meeting these criteria will not be displayed, however,
they will still be archived.
"Lock dialog"
Sets the lock criteria. All messages which satisfy these criteria are not
displayed and not archived
"Print message report"
Function to create documentation by configuring message selection
"Print current view"
Initiates printing of messages displayed in the message window. The print job
used for printing may be specified in the control properties of the "General"
tab.
"Emergency acknowledgment"
Emergency acknowledgment of a message with mandatory acknowledgment.
Using this function, the acknowledgment bit of a selected single message is
sent directly to AS, even if the message is not pending
"First message"
Selects the first of the currently pending messages. The visible area of the
message window is moved if necessary. This button is only enabled if the
"AutoScroll" function is deactivated.
"Last message"
Selects the last of the currently pending messages. The visible area of the
message window is moved if necessary. This button is only enabled if the
"AutoScroll" function is deactivated.
"Next message"
Selects the next message (relative to the currently selected one). The visible
area of the message window is moved if necessary. This button is only enabled
if the "AutoScroll" function is deactivated.
Previous message
Selects the previous message (in relation to the currently selected one). The
visible area of the message window is moved if necessary. This button is only
enabled if the "AutoScroll" function is deactivated.
"Info text dialog"
Opens a dialog to display info texts
"Comments dialog"
Opens a text editor to enter comments.
This button appears only in connection with the long-term archive window.
Therefore any configuration of this function has an effect on the Alarm Control
properties only in this window type.
"Loop in Alarm"
Shows a picture for the selected message or triggers a script.
The function can alternatively be triggered by double-clicking on a message.
"Release message"
This button releases a message selected from the lock list.
"Lock message"
This button locks a message in the current message lists and in the message
archive lists
"Sort dialog"
Opens a dialog box to create a user-defined sorting of displayed messages.
A user-defined sort has a higher priority than a sort by "MsgCtrlFlags"
attributes.
"Time base dialog"

Opens a dialog box to create a time base for the times displayed in the
messages.
Possible Elements of the Status Bar
Button
Description
Date
System date
Time
System time
List:
Number of current messages pending in the message list
Window:
Number of messages in window
Quit:
Number of pending messages with mandatory

acknowledgment
Lock is set
Selection is made
CHAPTER-I
How to create an On Line Trend
Configuring a Trend Window

Introduction
The following steps indicate how to configure a trend window.
You use the "Graphics Designer" editor to configure the trend window. To do so, create a new
process picture. Insert the smart object "WinCC Online Trend Control" into the process
picture. In the "Qckstart" project you link this object to the archive tag "FillLevel_Archive".
This causes the values stored in the archive tag to be output as a trend in Runtime.
Requirements
The process value archive "TankLevel_Archive" has been created.
Procedure
1. Create a new process picture with the name "TagLogging.pdl" and open it with the
"Graphics Designer" editor.
2. Insert the smart object "Control" into the process picture "TagLogging.pdl".
The "Insert a Control" dialog opens.

In the "Insert a Control" dialog, select the "WinCC Online Trend Control":
3.
The trend window appears in the work area of the "Graphics Designer" editor. The dialog
"Properties of WinCC Online Trend Control" opens.
4. Enter "TankLevel_Trends" as the window title and accept the default settings:
5. Enter "TankLevel" as the trend name and click on the "Selection" button:
The "Selection of Archives/Tags" dialog opens.

6. In the "Selection of Archives/Tags" dialog, select the archive tag "FillLevel_Archive":
7. Exit the "Properties of WinCC Online Trend Control" dialog by clicking the "OK" button.
Result
You have configured the "TankLevel_Trends" trend window. In Runtime, this window
outputs as a trend those values stored in the archive tag "FillLevel_Archive".
In order to output the values stored in the archive tag as a table in Runtime, you need to
configure a table window in the "Graphics Designer" editor in the following steps.
How to insert a trend display - "WinCC OnlineTrend control"
Procedure
Start Graphics Designer and open a picture.
From the "Controls" object palette, select the object "WinCC Online Trend Control".
Insert a trend display into the picture. To do so, point the mouse on the location in the
working area where you want the trend display placed. While keeping the mouse button
pressed, drag the object to the desired size.
After you release the mouse button, the "Properties of WinCC Online Trend Control"
dialog will open. On the "General" tabbed card, set the layout of the trend display.
Click on the "Trend" tab and select the tags to be displayed and other properties of the
trend curves. Close the dialog.
Online Configuration of OnlineTrend control.

Introduction
In order to change the configuration of Online Trend Control in Runtime, you have four
options available.
Key Function "Open Set Configuration Dialog"
The key function "Open Set Configuration Dialog"
display.
allows all essential settings for trend
Key Function "Dialog for Archive and Tag Selection"

The key function "Dialog for Archive and Tag Selection"
linked to trends in the trend window.
allows specification of tags
Field
Trends
Description
Here, you can select one of the configured trends.
Selection
Use the "Selection" button to open the dialog for selecting an archive
and the tags contained therein.
Persistence If the option "Persistence in RT and CS" is not activated, any changes
made to the settings are only effective within Runtime. Whether or not
any changed settings will remain effective after a picture change is
depends on the option "Persistence in RT".
If the option "Persistence in RT and CS" is activated, the changed
settings will also be transferred to the configuration system. To do this
you must open the picture in Graphics Designer and must save it again.
The changed settings will also be used during reactivation of the
project.
Key Function "Dialog for Trend Selection"
The key function "Dialog for Trend Selection"
and invisible trends.
Field
Trend in the
Foreground
opens a dialog to toggle between visible
Description
If common axes are used, the settings for the first trend will be
used for the display. The first trend can be changed either in this
dialog or by using the "Previous Trend in the Front" and "Next
Trend in the Front" buttons in the toolbar.
Trend
In this area, you can specify which configured trends are not to be
Visible/Invisible displayed.
Persistence
If the option "Persistence in RT and CS" is not activated, any

changes made to the settings are only effective within Runtime.
Whether or not any changed settings will remain effective after a
picture change is depends on the option "Persistence in RT".

settings will also be transferred to the configuration system. To do
this you must open the picture in Graphics Designer and must save
it again. The changed settings will also be used during reactivation
of the project.
Note:
The first trend of a trend window cannot be assigned the "invisible" attribute.
Key Function "Select Time Range"
The key function "Select Time Range"
opens a dialog to specify the time range to be
displayed. If the trends of a trend window are to be displayed with a common time axis, the
specified time range will apply to all trends.
Field
Trends
Description
Here, you can select one of the configured trends.
Time
Selection
Specification of a time interval to be displayed in the trend window

may take place
by entering a start and an end point (the "Time Range" setting
not activated).
by entering a start time and a time range. ("Time Range"
setting activated). The length of the time interval to be
displayed is determined by multiplying the "Factor" by the
"Range".
Persistence If the option "Persistence in RT and CS" is not activated, any changes
made to the settings are only effective within Runtime. Whether or
not any changed settings will remain effective after a picture change
is depends on the option "Persistence in RT".

settings will also be transferred to the configuration system. To do this
you must open the picture in Graphics Designer and must save it
again. The changed settings will also be used during reactivation of
the project.
The entry format of the date and time is dependent on the runtime language used.
How to Insert Online Trend Control in a Picture

Introduction
Display of tag values during Runtime takes place in ActiveX Control, inserted and
configured in a picture in Graphics Designer.
Procedure
1
2
Procedure
Start Graphics Designer and open a new picture.
Click on the object "WinCC Online Table Control" of the "Controls" tab in the
object palette.
Position the mouse cursor on a location on the picture where you wish to insert the
Control.
The mouse cursor changes to a cross-hair with an attached object symbol.
Drag the Control to its desired size by holding the mouse button down.
The dialog "Insert a Control" opens.
Select WinCC Online Trend Control and confirm your selection by clicking "OK".
The quick configuration dialog "Properties of WinCC Function Trend Control"
opens.
Configure the table properties according to your specifications.
Close the dialog by clicking "OK".
WinCC Function Trend Control.

Introduction
For a graphic processing of tags, Function Trend Control in WinCC offers the option of
displaying one tags as a function of another tag. For example, temperature may be shown as a
function of pressure. Furthermore, trends may be compared to target trends.
Display of trends during Runtime takes place in ActiveX Control, inserted and configured in
a picture in Graphics Designer.
Requirement
For the display of trends in WinCC Function Trend Control, the following requirements
apply:
In a WinCC Function Trend Control any number of trends may be displayed.

However, it is recommended to configure no more than 8 trends.
Any trend may display a maximum number of 10000 value pairs.
For these trends, either online tags, archive tags, or data from user archives may be
used.
Online tags of a trend must have the identical update cycle.
Archive tags of a trend must have the same update cycle and must be acquired
cyclically and continuously.
Data from user archives can be used for target trends.
Any display of tags as a function of time is possible only if the trends are supplied
with values via an API interface. In order to display tags as a function of time, you
should use the WinCC Function Trend Control.
Resolution of a Trend Display

The number of trend values that can be displayed on the screen is limited by the screen
resolution and selected size of the trend window. Therefore, when displaying trends, it is
possible that fewer values are displayed in the trend window than are actually archived.
If, for example, in an area of 100 pixels, 200 measurement values are archived, each pixel
will represent a pair of 2 measurement values. The value shown on the screen will be that of
the most recent data (most recent time stamp).
Operating the Function Trend Control in runtime

Introduction
The trend window is operated in runtime via the buttons in the toolbar.
"Online-Help System"
"Open the Configuration Dialog"
"Display Value at this Position"
"Enlarge Area"
"Activate Original View"
"Opens the dialog for selecting a trend"
"Previous Trend to the Front"
"Next Trend to the Front"
"Start/Stop the Update"
Operation of OnlineTrend Control in Runtime

Introduction
The Trend window in Runtime is operated via the toolbar buttons.
"Online Help System"
Calls up the online help

"Open the Configuration Dialog"
Select dialog to assign display parameters
"First Data Record"
Upon activating the button, the tag characteristics are displayed in the Trend
window within the specified time frame, beginning with the first archived
value.
"Previous Data Record"
Upon activating the button, the tag characteristics are displayed in the trend
window for the previous time interval, based on the currently displayed time
interval
"Next Data Record"
window for the next time interval , based on the currently displayed time
interval
"Last Data Record"
window within the specified time frame, ending with the last archived value
"Display Value at this Position"
This function allows you to determine the coordinate points of a trend.
"Zoom Area"
The zoom function allows you to enlarge any segment of the trend window
"Activate Original View"
This button allows you to return to the configured normal view from the
zoomed trend display
"Dialog for the Archive and Tag Selection"
This button will open the dialog for Archive and Tag Selection
"Dialog for Trend Selection"
This button opens a dialog for toggling between visible and invisible trends.
"Select Time Range"
This button opens a dialog to set the time range displayed in the trend window
"Previous Trend in the Front"

With this button, you can display the previous trend in the foreground of the
trend window.
"Next Trend in the Front"
With this button, you can display the next trend in the foreground of the trend
window.
"Start / Stop Update"
Stops the updated display. The values are stored in a clipboard and reentered
after activating the button again.
"Start/Stop Update"
Resumes the display.
"Print Log"
Initiates printing of trends displayed in the Trend window. The print job used
for printing may be specified in the control properties on the "General" tab.
"Select Statistics Area"
Allows specification of time range to calculate statistics in trend window using
vertical lines.
"Calculate Statistics"
Right mouse
button on
the trend
Opens a statistics window to display minimum, maximum, average and

standard deviation for a specified time frame and a specified trend.
After halting the update, you can use the right mouse button on any point of the
trend to display archive name and tag name and the coordinates of this point.
Note:
The "Display Value at This Position" button on the toolbar can be used to display the
coordinate points of a trend. The displayed tag values can also be assigned an additional
attribute in the form of a letter. The letters have the following meanings:
- Letter "i" : The indicated tag value is interpolated.
- Letter "u" : The indicated value has an uncertain status. This attribute is displayed when the
initial value is not known after Runtime has been activated, or when a substitute value is
used.
The buttons for "scrolling" in archives are only available when the trend which is to be
displayed originated in a process value archive.
Visualizing process value developments

Overview
WinCC allows you to visualize the temporary development of process values. Here, it will be
necessary to access historic process values. Process values which are used to show
development must therefore be saved in a process value archive.
Configuring with the Graphics Designer
Three picture elements have been provided in WinCC specially for the purpose of accessing
the process value archive and displaying data in tabular and in graphical form:
the WinCC Online Trend Control for graphical display

the WinCC Function Trend Control for the graphical processing of tags. The Trend
Control function gives you the option of displaying the values of tags as the function
of another tag
the WinCC Online Table Control for tabular display
The required control can be dragged with the mouse from the object palette in the Graphics
Designer and inserted into one of your screens. The controls can be found in the object
palette of the Graphics Designer on the "Controls" tab.
Connecting with the archive

Once you have dragged the control into your screen, the configuration dialog of this control
will automatically appear. Enter the process tags that are to be displayed by the control. Click
on "Archive/Tag selection" and select the process value archive which contains the process
values that have been recorded for the process tags.
When in runtime, the development of the archived process data will appear in the control.
WinCC Online Trend Control

Introduction
In order to process data in graphic form, WinCC uses Online Trend Control to offer the
option of displaying process data as a trend. The trend type to be used may be selected.
Furthermore you have the option of displaying current or archived values.
Display of tag values during Runtime takes place in ActiveX Control, inserted and
configured in a picture in Graphics Designer.
Requirement
For the display of trends in WinCC Online Trend Control the following requirements apply:
In a WinCC Online Trend Control any number of trends may be displayed. However,
it is recommended to configure no more than 8 trends.
Any trend may display a maximum number of 30000 value pairs. However, the
display may vary depending on monitor resolution and settings.
The trends may use either online tags or archived tags.
Online tags of a trend must have the identical update cycle.
In order to display tags as a function of other tags, you should use the WinCC
Function Trend Control.
Resolution of a Trend Display

The number of trend values that can be displayed on the screen is limited by the screen
resolution and selected size of the trend window. Therefore, when displaying trends, it is
possible that fewer values are displayed in the trend window than are actually archived.
If, for example, in an area of 100 pixels 200 measurement values are archived, each pixel
will represent 2 measurement values. The value shown on the screen will be that of the most
recent data (most recent time stamp).

SCADA Study Material

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SCADA Study Material

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SCADA Study Material

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contents of Windows Control Center.

Working With Projects.

The types of project in WinCC.

How to create a project and work with project.

How to activate and deactivate a project.

How to copy a project.

Working with tags.

Tag Management and tag selection dialog box.

Create and edit tags.

Logging tags in Runtime.

Creating Process Pictures

How to use the Graphics Designer editor.

Working with Pictures.

Working with objects.

The properties of an object.

Working with objects in the Object Palette.

Working with Controls.

Testing Process Pictures in Runtime.

Setting Up an Alarm System

Alarm Logging in WinCC.

Configuring the Message System.

Displaying messages in Runtime.

On Line Trend Control

How to create an On Line Trend

Displaying On Line Trend in Runtime

Working With Projects

from the Windows Start menu

using a shortcut from the Windows Desktop

in the Windows Explorer using a project file <PROJECT>.MCP

with a project that opens in Autostart

Start Mode of the WinCC Explorer

Opening the WinCC Explorer

Opening a Project in the Windows Explorer

Opening the WinCC Explorer with a Project Open

button in the toolbar.

Opening a Project with Autostart

Opening the WinCC Explorer

With the "Close" button

When you shut down Windows

With a C action in the activated project

Closing the WinCC Explorer

Close project and exit WinCC

If active, the project is also deactivated and closed. The

Exit WinCC Explorer

Only the WinCC Explorer closes. The project remains open

"File" Menu, "Shut Down" Command

The structure of the WinCC Explorer

Navigation window and data window

Menu Bar of the WinCC Explorer

Online Help (Chapter)

<CTRL+N> Creates a new project.

Working with Projects >

<CTRL+O> Opens an existing project.

Working with Projects >

Closes an open project.

Working with Projects >

Starts an open project in runtime.

Working with Projects >

Prints the project documentation.